2018 SENTRA
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
This manual was prepared to help you un-
derstand the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before
operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Book-
let explains details about the warranties
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual
explains details about maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-
solve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-
der your state’s lemon law.
When you require any service or have any
questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to
assist you with the extensive resources
available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with
additional accessories installed prior to de-
livery. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions con-
cerning proper use of such accessories
prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-
cessory. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements assisting you in the safe op-
eration of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for
conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle fea-
tures or taking other actions that
could distract you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-
propriate child restraint systems. Pre-
teen children should be seated in the
rear seat.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
∙ ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety fea-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle.
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its
performance, safety, emissions or du-
rability and may even violate govern-
mental regulations. In addition, dam-
age or performance problems
resulting from modifications may not
be covered under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-
agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for ex-
ample remote insurance company
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
telematics or engine reprogramming,
may cause interference or damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of any aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-
ranty may not cover damage caused by
any aftermarket plug-in device.
This manual includes information for all
features and equipment available on this
model. Features and equipment in your ve-
hicle may vary depending on model, trim
level, options selected, order, date of pro-
duction, region or availability. Therefore,
you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or in-
stalled on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustra-
tions in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the
right to change specifications, perfor-
mance, design or component suppliers
without notice and without obligation.
From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with
the most accurate information currently
available. Please carefully read and retain
with this manual all revision updates sent
to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-
cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-
tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-
sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner
section of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide
. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-
fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-
GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or seri-
ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce
the risk, the procedures must be fol-
lowed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed
carefully.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illus-
tration.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm.
APD1005
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including
engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known
to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the en-
gine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands fre-
quently when servicing your vehicle.
For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer to
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed to
Visteon and Bosch.
SiriusXM® services
require a subscrip-
tion after trial pe-
riod and are sold
separately or as a
package. The
satellite service is
available only in the
48 contiguous USA
and DC. SiriusXM®
satellite service is
also available in
Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca.
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, me-
chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-
erwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide NISSAN directly
with comments or questions, please con-
tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-
ment using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone
number
– Vehicle identification number (attached
to the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the informa-
tion at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumer[email protected]om
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.c[email protected]om
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Do-it-yourself
Maintenance and schedules
Technical and consumer information
Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2
Exterior front ....................................0-3
Exterior rear .....................................0-4
Passenger compartment........................0-5
Instrument panel ................................0-6
Engine compartment check locations ...........0-8
Warning and indicator lights ....................0-10
1. Top tether anchors (P. 1-23)
2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-12)
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and supplemental rollover air bag
(P. 1-44)
4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7)
5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)
and shoulder height adjuster
(P. 1-12, 1-44)
6. Supplemental front-impact air
bags (P. 1-44)
7. Front seats (P. 1-2)
8. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-44)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-44)
10. Rear seats (P. 1-2)
11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system (P. 1-23)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2403
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
1. Engine hood (P. 3-25)
2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-39)
3. Windshield (P. 8-19)
4. Power windows (P. 2-56)
5. Door locks (P. 3-5)
Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-8)
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
(if so equipped) (P. 3-11)
Keys (P. 3-2)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-32)
7. Tire pressure (P. 8-35)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-35)
8. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-41)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
(if so equipped) (P. 2-41)
9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-41)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
(if so equipped) (P. 2-41)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2427
EXTERIOR FRONT
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
1. Trunk lid (P. 3-26)
Trunk lid release (P. 3-26)
2. High-mounted stop light
(if so equipped) (P. 8-29)
3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)
4. Rear window defroster switch
(P. 2-40)
5. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)
6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-27)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-27)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
7. Rearview camera (P. 4-10)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2382
EXTERIOR REAR
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
1. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-59)
2. Interior lights (P. 2-60)
3. Sun visors (P. 3-30)
4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-32)
5. Glove box (P. 2-50)
6. Cup holders (P. 2-50)
7. Parking brake (P. 5-25)
8. Console box (P. 2-50)
9. Rear armrest (if so equipped) (P. 1-2)
Cup holders (if so equipped)
(P. 2-50)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2472
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
1. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-41)
2. Steering wheel switch for trip
computer (if so equipped)/vehicle
information display (if so
equipped) (P. 2-9, P.2-23)
Audio control (P. 4-34)
3. Driver’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-51)
Horn (P. 2-47)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicators lights
(P. 2-13)
5. Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-45)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-47)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-79, 4-91)
6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-39)
7. Vents (P. 4-17)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
9. Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-44)
10. Audio system (P. 4-34)
LII2498
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
11. Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-44)
12. Glove box (P. 2-50)
13. Shift lever (P. 5-17)
14. Climate controls (P. 4-23, 4-31)
15. Ignition switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-9)
Push-button ignition switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-11)
16. Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-30)
17. Hood release (P. 3-25)
Fuel filler door release (P. 3-27)
18. ECO mode switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-26)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-48)
SPORT mode switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-26)
19. Instrument brightness control
(P. 2-41)
Power mirror switch (P. 3-32)
Trunk release (P. 3-26)
* Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
MRA8DE engine
1. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
3. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
4. Battery (P. 8-14)
5. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-22)
6. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)
7. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
9. Drive belt location (P.8-16)
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LDI2931
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
MR16DDT engine
1. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
3. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
4. Battery (P. 8-14)
5. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-22)
6. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)
7. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)
9. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)
11. Relay box (DTRL) (if so equipped)
(P. 8-22)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LDI3011
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Warning
light
Name Page
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
2-14
Automatic Emer-
gency Braking
(AEB) system
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-14
or
Brake warning
light
2-14
Charge warning
light
2-15
Door open warn-
ing light (if so
equipped)
2-15
Warning
light
Name Page
Engine oil pres-
sure warning light
(if so equipped)
2-15
Low fuel warning
light (if so
equipped)
2-16
Low tire pressure
warning light
2-16
Low windshield-
washer fluid
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-18
Master warning
light (if so
equipped)
2-18
or
Power steering
warning light
2-18
Warning
light
Name Page
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-18
Shift P (Park)
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-19
Supplemental air
bag warning light
2-19
Indicator
light
Name Page
Continuously
Variable Trans-
mission (CVT) po-
sition indicator
light (CVT models)
(if so equipped)
2-19
Cruise main
switch indicator
light (if so
equipped)
2-20
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Indicator
light
Name Page
ECO mode indica-
tor light (if so
equipped)
2-20
Engine start op-
eration indicator
light (if so
equipped)
2-20
Front fog light in-
dicator light (if so
equipped)
2-20
Front passenger
air bag status
light
2-20
High beam indi-
cator light (blue)
2-20
Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)
2-20
Overdrive OFF
indicator light (if
so equipped)
2-21
Indicator
light
Name Page
Security indicator
light
2-21
Side light and
headlight indica-
tor light (green)
2-21
Slip indicator light 2-21
SPORT mode indi-
cator light (if so
equipped)
2-22
Turn signal/
hazard indicator
lights
2-22
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light
2-22
Illustrated table of contents 0-11
MEMO
0-12 Illustrated table of contents
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats............................................ 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment
(for passenger’s seat and if so
equipped for driver’s seat) .....................1-3
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped for driver’s seat)............... 1-5
Folding rear seat ............................. 1-6
Center armrest (if so equipped)................1-7
Head restraints/headrests .......................1-7
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components .................................1-8
Non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest components........................ 1-9
Remove......................................1-9
Install.........................................1-10
Adjust ........................................1-10
Seatbelts.......................................1-12
Precautions on seat belt usage ...............1-12
Seat belt warning light........................1-15
Pregnant women.............................1-15
Injured persons...............................1-15
Three-point type seat belt with
retractor .....................................1-15
Seat belt extenders..........................1-20
Seat belt maintenance ......................1-20
Child safety......................................1-21
Infants ......................................1-22
Small children ...............................1-22
Larger children ..............................1-22
Child restraints .................................1-23
Precautions on child restraints ..............1-23
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system ............................1-26
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH.................................1-28
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts .........................1-30
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH .....................1-33
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts..............1-36
Booster seats ................................1-41
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...........1-44
Precautions on SRS..........................1-44
Supplemental air bag warning labels ........1-62
Supplemental air bag warning light..........1-63
WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. For additional information,
refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely locked.
∙ Do not leave children unattended in-
side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in se-
rious accidents.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. The seat may
move suddenly and could cause loss
of control of the vehicle.
∙ The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight
up in the seat. If the seatback is re-
clined, the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is increased.
ARS1152
SEATS
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (for passenger’s
seat and if so equipped for
driver’s seat)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-
ally. For additional information about ad-
justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it
while you slide the seat forward or back-
ward to the desired position. Release the
bar to lock the seat in position.
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and lean back. To bring the seatback for-
ward, pull the lever up and lean your body
forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-
back in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
LRS2642 LRS2643
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
lever (CVT) is in P (Park) or the manual shift
lever is in N (Neutral) with the parking brake
applied.
Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired po-
sition is achieved.
LRS2644
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped for driver’s seat)
Operating tips
∙ The power seat motor has an auto-
reset overload protection circuit. If the
motor stops during operation, wait
30 seconds then reactivate the switch.
∙ Do not operate the power seat switch
for a long period of time when the en-
gine is off. This will discharge the bat-
tery.
Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the
desired angle is obtained.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section. Also, the seatback can
be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is stopped and the shift
lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
with the parking brake fully applied.
LRS2662
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Seat lifter
Move the switch as shown to adjust the
height of the seat cushion.
Lumbar support
The lumbar support feature provides ad-
justable lower back support to the driver.
Push the switch as shown to adjust the
seatback lumbar area.
FOLDING REAR SEAT
Pull the knob
䊊
A
to fold each seatback
down.
WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seat when it
is in the fold-down position. Use of
these areas by passengers without
proper restraints could result in seri-
ous injury or death in an accident or
sudden stop.
LRS2784 LRS2745 LRS2194
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched po-
sition. If they are not completely se-
cured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
∙ Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
rear seatback and trunk lid securely
latched when not in use, and prevent
children’s access to car keys.
CENTER ARMREST (if so equipped)
Pull the armrest down as shown.
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions. Adjustable head
restraints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach any-
thing to the head restraint/headrest
stalks or remove the head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has been
removed. If the head restraint/headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly ad-
just the head restraint/headrest before
an occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision.
LRS2217
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
The illustration shows the seating posi-
tions equipped with head
restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is
equipped with a head restraint.
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be inte-
grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch
to secure them to the seat frame.
∙ Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the
head restraint/headrest so the cen-
ter of your ear is approximately level
with the center of the head
restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint/headrest at the
highest position.
∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled
and locked in place before riding in that
designated seating position.
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
LRS3024 LRS2300
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.
LRS2299 LRS2302
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest
stalks with the holes in the seat. Make
sure that the head restraint/headrest is
facing the correct direction. The stalk
with the notch (notches)
䊊
1
must be
installed in the hole with the lock knob
䊊
2
.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears. If
your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
For non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
LRS2305 LRS2306
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
SSS0136
SEAT BELTS
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.
WARNING
∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.
SSS0134 SSS0016
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
WARNING
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal inju-
ries in an accident.
∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-
curely fastened to the proper buckle.
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
∙ If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and all
seat belts fastened, it may indicate a
malfunction in the system. Have the
system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do not
modify the seat belt, add material, or
install devices that may change the
seat belt routing or tension. Doing so
may affect the operation of the seat
belt system. Modifying or tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any colli-
sion. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt
assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was mi-
nor and the belts show no damage
and continue to operate properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use during
a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or im-
proper operation is noted.
∙ All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the re-
straint manufacturer’s inspection in-
structions and replacement recom-
mendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.
SSS0014
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front
seats are equipped with a seat belt warn-
ing light. The warning light, located on the
instrument panel, will show the status of
the driver and passenger seat belt.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning
light will not light up if the seat is not
occupied.
For additional information, refer to “Warn-
ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-
minders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips, not
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-
ommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
belt properly.
LRS0786
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-
vated, the child can be seriously in-
jured or killed if the seat belt retracts
and becomes tight. This can occur
even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle
the seat belt to release the child. If the
seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a suitable
tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.
Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)
LRS2642
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-
tractor and insert the tongue into the
buckle
䊊
A
until you hear and feel the
latch engage.
∙ The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
Power front seat shown (if so equipped)
LRS2662
LRS2674
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips
䊊
B
as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
the retractor to take up extra slack
䊊
C
.
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear
seating positions’ three-point seat belts
have two modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-
tend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-
turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information, re-
fer to “Child restraints” in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During nor-
mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is ac-
tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension. It can also change the op-
eration of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, refer to
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” in this section.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be cer-
tain that the seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.
LRS2675
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
on the buckle
䊊
1
. The seat belt automati-
cally retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly
To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-
ward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service, or to learn more about seat
belt operation.
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, refer to “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To
adjust, pull out the adjustment button
䊊
1
and move the shoulder belt anchor to the
desired position
䊊
2
, so the belt passes over
the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the ad-
justment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.
WRS0139 LRS0242
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
WARNING
∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in
position.
∙ The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may re-
duce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the
lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available for purchase. The ex-
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and may be used for either the
driver or front passenger seating position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an
extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.
∙ Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal injury
in the event of an accident.
∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-
stall child restraints. If the child re-
straint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution rec-
ommended for cleaning upholstery or
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.
∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other
damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be re-
placed.
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-
lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-
lease the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect
them. They need to be properly re-
strained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, includ-
ing doctors, teachers, government traffic
safety offices, and community organiza-
tions. Every child is different, so be sure to
learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child re-
straint systems:
∙ Rear-facing child restraints
∙ Forward-facing child restraints
∙ Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-
facing child restraints are available for chil-
dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-
straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special pro-
tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-
tal injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. For
additional information, refer to “Child re-
straints” in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the ve-
hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-
chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because
your vehicle has a supplemental re-
straint system (air bag system) for the
front passenger. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)” in this section.
CHILD SAFETY
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and
use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh
at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a
rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-
sible up to the height or weight limit of the
child restraint. Children who outgrow the
height or weight limit of the rear-facing
child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-
facturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommen-
dations. NISSAN recommends that small
children be placed in child restraints that
comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-
ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they
reach the maximum height or weight limit
allowed by the child restraint manufac-
turer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forward-
facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
that the child be placed in a commercially
available booster seat to obtain proper
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
booster seat should raise the child so that
the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle por-
tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
should not cross the neck or face and
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
should lie snugly across the lower hips or
upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat can only be used in seating positions
that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
have a label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-
ing?
∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over
the front edge of the seat with feet flat
on the floor?
∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt
(lap belt low and snug across the hips
and shoulder belt across mid-chest
and shoulder)?
∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-
justed head restraint/headrest?
∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
If you answered no to any of these ques-
tions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installation
of child restraints could result in serious
injury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
– The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always fol-
low all of the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
LRS2690 ARS1098
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
– Infants and children should never
be held on anyone’s lap. Even the
strongest adult cannot resist the
forces of a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both
a child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children
are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front
seat. If you must install a forward-
facing child restraint in the front
seat, refer to “Forward-facing child
restraint installation using the seat
belts” in this section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could se-
riously injure or kill a child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child re-
straint that will fit the child and ve-
hicle. Some child restraints may
not fit properly in your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used to at-
tach adult seat belts, or other items
or equipment to the vehicle. Doing
so could damage the child re-
straint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly in-
stalled using the damaged
anchorage, and a child could be se-
riously injured or killed in a
collision.
– Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts, or other items.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child
restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while in the vehicle.
WRS0256
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, loose objects can injure occu-
pants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal
child restraint anchor system, referred to
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints
include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-
ments that can be connected to these an-
chors. For additional information, refer to
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be
used.
Several manufacturers offer child re-
straints for infants and children of various
sizes. When selecting any child restraint,
keep the following points in mind:
∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-
tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-
dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-
cle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjust-
ments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child’s height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH
anchors or the seat belt to install the
child restraint (not both at the same
time).
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint.
∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installa-
tion.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the ve-
hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-
quires the top tether strap on forward-
facing child restraints be secured to the
designated anchor point on the vehicle.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special an-
chor points that are used with LATCH sys-
tem compatible child restraints. This sys-
tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint unless the
combined weight of the child and child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-
cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to
install child restraints in the rear outboard
seating positions only. Do not attempt to
install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the loca-
tions shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in
the center rear seating position us-
ing the LATCH lower anchors. The
child restraint will not be secured
properly.
– Inspect the lower anchors by in-
serting your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured prop-
erly if the lower anchors are
obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
LATCH system lower anchor locations
WRS0756
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback
to help you locate the LATCH lower an-
chors.
Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-
ments that can be connected to two an-
chors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.
LATCH lower anchor location
WRS0700
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LRS0661
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
LRS0662
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Top tether anchor point locations
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments or
seat belts. For additional information, refer
to “Installing top tether strap” in this sec-
tion.
If you have any questions when install-
ing a top tether strap child restraint, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Anchor points
䊊
1
are located on the rear
parcel shelf.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.
LRS0723
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower an-
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to com-
press the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
WRS0801
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
WRS0802
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0673
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
4. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the re-
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint or try installing by using
the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not
all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0674
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat. Position the child restraint
on the seat. Always follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode). It reverts to the ELR
mode when the seat belt is fully re-
tracted.
Rear-facing – step 1
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 2
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS2395
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rear-
ward firmly in the center of the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS2396
Rear-facing – step 5
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 6
LRS2397
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
7. Check to make sure that the child re-
straint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forward-
facing child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower an-
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.
Forward-facing webbing-mounted –
step 2
WRS0799
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Do not install child restraints that re-
quire the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seat-
back.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
rect child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your knee to com-
press the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
WRS0800
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0671
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the re-
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard posi-
tions only).
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0697
Rear seats
LRS2627
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Position the top tether strap
䊊
1
over the
seatback.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point
䊊
2
as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
If you have any questions when install-
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front pas-
senger air bag. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
WRS0699
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Follow these steps to install a forward-
facing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats or in the front passen-
ger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and,
therefore, must not be used in the
front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seat-
back.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
rect child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section.
Forward-facing – step 3
WRS0680
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Do not install child restraints that re-
quire the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 5
LRS0668
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rear-
ward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 2 through 8.
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 8
WRS0698
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front
passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is not illu-
minated, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Position the top tether strap
䊊
1
over the
seatback.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point
䊊
2
as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Position the top tether strap
䊊
1
over the
seatback.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point
䊊
2
as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
If you have any questions when install-
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Forward-facing — step 10
WRS0475
Rear seats
LRS2627
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-
structions outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-
lision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s
face and neck and the lap portion
of the belt does not cross the
stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the
child’s arm.
– A booster seat must only be in-
stalled in a seating position that
has a lap/shoulder belt.
A. Low back booster seat
B. High back booster seat
LRS2479
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:
∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard 213.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-
cle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-
erly supported by the booster seat or
vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
or above the center of the child’s ears.
For example, if a low back booster seat
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
at or above the center of the child’s ears.
If the seatback is lower than the center
of the child’s ears, a high back booster
seat should be used.
∙ If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place the child in the
booster seat and check the various ad-
justments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with the child. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the ve-
hicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-
ing a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-
tions of this manual before installing a child
restraint.
LRS0453 LRS0464
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the rear seat or in the front passenger
seat:
1. If you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, move the seat to the
rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions.
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
rect booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the booster seat is removed. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-
ing the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-
structions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat
belt with retractor” in this section.
WRS0699
Front passenger position
LRS0454
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front pas-
senger air bag status light
may or
may not illuminate, depending on the
size of the child and the type of booster
seat being used. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important infor-
mation concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-
tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System)
∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag
∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-
tem
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head
and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact col-
lisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-
pacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and
rear outboard seating positions in certain
side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags
are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the
curtain air bags are designed to inflate and
remain inflated for a short time.
The SRS is designed to supplement the
crash protection provided by the driver and
front passenger seat belts and is not a
substitute for them. Seat belts should al-
ways be correctly worn and the occupant
seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door
finishers. For additional information, refer
to “Seat belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
WRS0475
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity
frontal collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents
∙ The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit. For additional information,
refer to “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section.
∙ The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are sit-
ting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, if you are unre-
strained,leaning forward, sitting side-
ways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in
a crash. You may also receive serious
or fatal injuries from the front air bag
if you are up against it when it inflates.
Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sen-
sors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage, then in-
flates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can in-
crease the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
WRS0031
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sen-
sor (weight sensor) that turns the
front passenger air bag OFF under
some conditions. This sensor is only
used in this seat. Failure to be properly
seated and wearing the seat belt can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase
the risk that they are injured when the
front air bag inflates.
ARS1133
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.
ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
WARNING
∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating front air bag could seri-
ously injure or kill your child. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Child re-
straints” in this section.
ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
over supplemental air bags:
∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
WARNING
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on
the floor. The side air bag and curtain
air bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand, leg
or face near the side air bag on the
side of the seatback of the front seat
or near the side roof rails. Do not allow
anyone sitting in the front seats or
rear outboard seats to extend their
hand out of the window or lean
against the door. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the previous illustrations.
WARNING
∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions are shown in the
illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.
WRS0431 WRS0032
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
SSS0162 SSS0159
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Top tether anchor
2. Rear seat belts
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
4. Head restraints/headrests
5. Front seat belts
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags
7. Front crash zone sensor
8.
Pressure sensors in door (front passen-
ger side shown; driver’s side similar)
9. Front seats
10. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor)
11. Satellite crash zone sensor
12.
Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
13. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag
14. Rear seats
15. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system
16. Satellite crash zone sensor
LRS2774
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air bag Sys-
tem, please observe the following
items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing press-
ing against the rear of the seatback,
such as a child restraint installed in
the rear seat or an object stored on
the floor.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed between the seat cushion and
center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.
∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is
installed in the front passenger seat,
do not position the front passenger
seat so the child restraint contacts the
instrument panel. If the child restraint
does contact the instrument panel,
the system may determine the seat is
occupied and the passenger air bag
may deploy in a collision. Also the
front passenger air bag status light
may not illuminate. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Child restraints” in
this section.
∙ Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status
light.
∙ If you notice that the front passenger
air bag status light is not operating as
described in this section, get the oc-
cupant classification system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Until you have confirmed with a
dealer that your passenger seat occu-
pant classification system is working
properly, position the occupants in
the rear seating positions.
∙ Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status
light may illuminate and the supple-
mental air bag warning light may
flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is de-
signed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. All of the information, cautions
and warnings in this manual must be fol-
lowed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not in-
flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-
cation of proper front air bag system op-
eration.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU). Infla-
tor operation is based on the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage for the driver.
For the front passenger, the occupant clas-
sification sensor is also monitored. Based
on information from the sensor, only one
front air bag may inflate in a crash, depend-
ing on the crash severity and whether the
front occupants are belted or unbelted. Ad-
ditionally, the front passenger air bag may
be automatically turned off under some
conditions, depending on the weight de-
tected on the front passenger seat and
how the seat belt is used. If the front pas-
senger air bag is OFF, the passenger air
bag status light will be illuminated. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Front passen-
ger air bag and status light” in this section.
One front air bag inflating does not indicate
improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information
about the system. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a dis-
ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-
tact information is contained in the front of
this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the re-
lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-
tion and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce seri-
ous injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-
straint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can in-
crease the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, the front air bag
module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protec-
tion. Failure to follow all instructions in
this manual concerning the use of
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag on or off depending on the weight ap-
plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-
tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or
OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
bag status light
which is located on
the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illumi-
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
CONDITION DESCRIPTION
PASSENGER AIR BAG
INDICATOR LIGHT (
)
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Nobody/Somebody
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger seat
ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED
In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as de-
scribed above depending on their weight.
For additional information, refer to “Normal
operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this
section.
WRS0475
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as de-
scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-
lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requir-
ing the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the
requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-
dance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regula-
tions is on the seat, its weight and the
child’s weight can be detected and cause
the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the front passenger air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small adults
it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-
pant takes his/her weight off the seat
cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,
by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing
the seat belt properly for the most effective
protection by the seat belt and supple-
mental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-
propriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classifica-
tion sensor is designed to operate as de-
scribed above to turn the front passenger
air bag OFF for specified child restraints as
required by the regulations. Failing to prop-
erly secure child restraints and to use the
ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or
move in a collision or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflat-
ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For
additional information, refer to “Child re-
straints” in this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight de-
tected by the occupant classification sen-
sor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and re-
strained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front pas-
senger air bag is automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illu-
minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, de-
pending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. If the air
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-
ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash),
it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure
that the child restraint is installed properly,
the seat belt is used properly and the occu-
pant is positioned properly. If the air bag
status light is still not illuminated, reposi-
tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can
check system status by using a special
tool. However, until you have confirmed
with a dealer that your air bag is working
properly, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the front passenger seat status. This is nor-
mal system operation and does not indi-
cate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-
ger air bag system, the supplemental air
bag warning light
, located in the me-
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will be illuminated (blinking or
steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front passen-
ger based on weight, please follow the pre-
cautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear
of the seatback.
∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the
front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger
seat or seatback is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-
ing against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet com-
fortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual.
Front passenger seat belt buckle sta-
tus is monitored by the occupant clas-
sification system, and is used as an in-
put to determine occupancy status. So,
it is highly recommended that the front
passenger fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the
front passenger before the vehicle is
put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by check-
ing the front passenger air bag status
light.
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification
sensor system generally keeps the clas-
sification locked during driving, so it is
important that you confirm that the
front passenger is properly classified
prior to driving. However, the occupant
classification sensor may recalculate the
weight of the occupant under some con-
ditions (both while driving and when
stopped), so front passenger seat occu-
pants should continue to remain seated
as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying
the front passenger seat:
∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The
front passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet com-
fortably extended to the floor.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front pas-
senger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Re-
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult,
child or child restraint occupying the
front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following con-
ditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and cen-
tered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ The child restraint is not properly in-
stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-
straints” section of this manual.
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front pas-
senger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Re-
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be re-
positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
3. If the light is OFF with no front passen-
ger and no objects on the front pas-
senger seat, the vehicle should be
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steer-
ing wheel or instrument panel. Such
objects may become dangerous pro-
jectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end struc-
ture. This could affect proper opera-
tion of the front air bag system.
∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal in-
jury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instru-
ment panel assembly by placing ma-
terial over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by in-
stalling additional trim material
around the air bag system.
∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-
senger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in seri-
ous personal injury.
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing ma-
terial on the seat cushion or by install-
ing additional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that are not
specifically designed to assure proper
air bag operation. Additionally, do not
stow any objects under the front pas-
senger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may interfere
with the proper operation of the occu-
pant classification sensor (weight
sensor).
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equip-
ment. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or discon-
nected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag
system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and
roof-mounted curtain side-
impact and rollover supplemental
air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside
of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-
tain air bags are located in the side roof
rails. All of the information, cautions and
warnings in this manual must be fol-
lowed. The side air bags and curtain air
bags are designed to inflate in higher se-
verity side collisions, although they may in-
flate if the forces in another type of collision
LRS0259
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
are similar to those of a higher severity
impact. They are designed to inflate on the
side where the vehicle is impacted. They
may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate
in certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-
ments (for example, during severe off-
roading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper side air bag and
curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is
not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those
with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the chest and pelvic area of the front occu-
pants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the
impact force to the head of occupants in
the front and rear outboard seating posi-
tions. They can help save lives and reduce
serious injuries. However, an inflating side
air bag and curtain air bag may cause
abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags
and curtain air bags do not provide re-
straint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver and passenger seated up-
right as far as practical away from the side
air bag. Rear seat passengers should be
seated as far away as practical from the
door finishers and side roof rails. The side
air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly
in order to help protect the front and rear
outboard occupants. Because of this, the
force of the side air bag and curtain air bag
inflating can increase the risk of injury if the
occupant is too close to, or is against, these
air bag modules during inflation. The side
air bag and will deflate quickly after the
collision is over.
The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a
short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door fin-
isher and the front seat. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if a side air bag
inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system com-
ponents will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to
or accidental inflation of the side air
bag and curtain air bag or damage to
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems.
1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag
systems.
∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal in-
jury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near
the seatbacks or by installing addi-
tional trim material, such as seat cov-
ers, around the side air bag.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. It is also recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for installa-
tion of electrical equipment. The SRS
wiring harnesses* should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthor-
ized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used
on the side air bag or curtain air bag
systems.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats)
WARNING
∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be re-
placed together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not
activated, be sure to have the preten-
sioner system checked and, if neces-
sary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental acti-
vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-
ing with the pretensioner system may
result in serious personal injury.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the pretensioner system. It is also rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the preten-
sioner system.
∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-
sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-
posal procedures could cause per-
sonal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate
with the supplemental air bag system in
certain types of collisions. Working with the
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-
comes involved in certain types of colli-
sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-
pants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the
seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-
chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.
These seat belts are used the same way as
conventional seat belts.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indi-
cate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breath-
ing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release web-
bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
light
is used to indicate malfunctions
in the pretensioner system. For additional
information, refer to "Supplemental air bag
warning light" in this section. If the opera-
tion of the supplemental air bag warning
light indicates there is a malfunction, have
the system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the preten-
sioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The warning labels are located on the
surface of the sun visor.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.
WRS0897
1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-
tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and
then turns off. This means the system is
operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and pretensioner systems need servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 sec-
onds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner
systems may not operate properly. They
must be checked and repaired. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
NOTE:
In the event of a crash involving an air
bag deployment (side, front or both), the
vehicle’s hazard lamps (turn indicators)
will turn ON automatically.
Repair and replacement
procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to
inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-
minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-
mental air bag warning light remains illu-
minated after inflation has occurred.These
systems should be repaired and/or re-
placed as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-
lated parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The
ignition switch should always be placed in
the LOCK position when working under the
hood or inside the vehicle.
LRS0100
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
WARNING
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again
and must be replaced. Additionally,
the activated pretensioner(s) must
also be replaced. The air bag module
and pretensioner(s) should be re-
placed. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
However, the air bag module and pre-
tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected if there is
any damage to the front end or side
portion of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner sys-
tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
checked to verify it is still functioning
correctly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The OCS should be checked even if no
air bags deploy as a result of the im-
pact. Failure to verify proper OCS
function may result in an improper air
bag deployment resulting in injury or
death.
1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
MEMO
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel ................................2-2
Meters and gauges..............................2-3
Speedometer and odometer .................2-4
Tachometer ..................................2-7
Engine coolant temperature gauge ..........2-7
Fuel gauge ...................................2-8
Trip computer (if so equipped) ................2-9
Outside temperature display ................2-12
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders ......................................2-13
Checking lights ..............................2-14
Warning lights ...............................2-14
Indicator lights ..............................2-19
Audible reminders...........................2-22
Vehicle information display (if so equipped) .....2-23
How to use the vehicle information
display ......................................2-23
Startup display ..............................2-24
Settings .....................................2-24
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators...............................2-32
Security systems ...............................2-36
Vehicle security system (if so equipped) .....2-36
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........2-38
Wiper and washer switch .......................2-39
Switch operation ............................2-39
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch................2-40
Headlight and turn signal switch ...............2-41
Headlight control switch.....................2-41
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system
(Type A) (if so equipped) .....................2-44
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system
(Type B) (if so equipped) .....................2-44
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (Type C — NISMO) (if so
equipped) ...................................2-44
Instrument brightness control...............2-45
Turn signal switch ...........................2-45
Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............2-46
Horn ...........................................2-47
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..........2-47
V
ehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
(if so equipped) .................................2-48
E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped)..............2-49
Power outlet....................................2-49
Storage ........................................2-50
Front-door pockets..........................2-50
Console side pockets (if so equipped)........2-51
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) ...........2-51
Storage pouch (if so equipped) ..............2-52
Storagetrays................................2-52
Glovebox....................................2-53
Console box .................................2-53
Slide front armrest (if so equipped) ..........2-54
Overhead sunglasses storage...............2-54
Cup holders .................................2-55
Windows .......................................2-56
Power windows .............................2-56
Moonroof (if so equipped) ......................2-59
Power moonroof ............................2-59
Interior lights ...................................2-60
Console light (if so equipped) ................2-61
Map lights ...................................2-61
Dome light ..................................2-62
Trunk light ......................................2-63
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
(if so equipped) .................................2-63
Programming HomeLink® ...................2-64
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers................2-65
Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver ..................................2-66
Programming trouble-diagnosis ............2-66
Clearing the programmed information ......2-66
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button.......................................2-67
If your vehicle is stolen.......................2-67
1. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-41)
2. Steering wheel switch for trip
computer (if so equipped)/vehicle
information display (if so
equipped) (P. 2-9, P.2-23)
Audio control (P. 4-34)
3. Driver’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-51)
Horn (P. 2-47)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Warning and indicators lights
(P. 2-13)
5. Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-45)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-47)
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-79, 4-91)
6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-39)
7. Vents (P. 4-17)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
9. Front passenger air bag status
light (P. 1-44)
10. Audio system (P. 4-34)
LII2498
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2 Instruments and controls
11. Front passenger supplemental air
bag (P. 1-44)
12. Glove box (P. 2-50)
13. Shift lever (P. 5-17)
14. Climate controls (P. 4-23, 4-31)
15. Ignition switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-9)
Push-button ignition switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-11)
16. Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-30)
17. Hood release (P. 3-25)
Fuel filler door release (P. 3-27)
18. ECO mode switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-26)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-48)
SPORT mode switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-26)
19. Instrument brightness control
(P. 2-41)
Power mirror switch (P. 3-32)
Trunk release (P. 3-26)
* Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
1. Tachometer
2. Coolant temperature gauge
3. Warning and indicator lights
4. Fuel gauge
5. Speedometer
6. Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Trip computer
Fuel Economy
ECO mode indicator (if so equipped)
Outside temperature display
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3415
METERS AND GAUGES
Instruments and controls 2-3
1. Tachometer
Warning and indicator lights
2. Vehicle information display
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Outside temperature display
3. Speedometer
Warning and indicator lights
4. Fuel gauge
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-
eter and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side the meter cluster.
The odometer is located within the vehicle
information display (TypeA—ifso
equipped) or the trip computer (Type B —
if so equipped) to the left of the speedom-
eter.
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3416
2-4 Instruments and controls
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle
speed.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer
䊊
2
and the twin trip odom-
eter
䊊
1
are displayed when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the dis-
tance of individual trips.
Changing the display
Press the
button on the steering
wheel to change the display as follows:
Accel guide/Average fuel economy → In-
stant fuel economy/Average fuel economy
→ Average fuel economy → Average speed
→ Distance to empty → Trip A → Trip B
LIC2255
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3050
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3526
Instruments and controls 2-5
Resetting the trip odometer
Press the
button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second to reset the
currently displayed trip odometer to zero.
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
message
For vehicles without a vehicle informa-
tion display: Push the reset button
䊊
A
for
more than 1 second to reset the LOOSE
FUEL CAP warning message in the trip
computer
䊊
B
after the fuel cap has been
tightened. For additional information, refer
to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
For vehicles with a vehicle information
display: For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators” in the section.
Check tire pressure warning
message (if so equipped)
The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning
message is displayed when the low tire
pressure warning light is illuminated and
low tire pressure is detected. Check and
adjust the tire pressure to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. The
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message turns
off when the low tire pressure warning light
turns off.
LPD2124 LIC2678
2-6 Instruments and controls
The low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated until the tires are inflated to the
recommended COLD tire pressure. The
CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is dis-
played each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illumi-
nated. For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in the “In-
struments and controls” section, “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section, and “Wheels
and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not rev the engine into the red zone
䊊
1
.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a read-
ing.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature. The engine coolant tempera-
ture is within the normal range when the
reading is within the zone
䊊
A
shown in the
illustration.
LIC2219
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2414
Instruments and controls 2-7
The engine coolant temperature varies
with the outside air temperature and driv-
ing conditions.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates a coolant tem-
perature near the hot (H) end of the nor-
mal range, reduce vehicle speed to de-
crease the temperature. If the gauge is
over the normal range, stop the vehicle
as soon as safely possible. If the engine
is overheated, continued operation of
the vehicle may seriously damage the
engine. For additional information, re-
fer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the
“In case of emergency” section for im-
mediate action required.
FUEL GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a read-
ing.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during brak-
ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3427
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2445
2-8 Instruments and controls
The low fuel warning light comes on when
the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-
isters 0 (Empty).
The arrow on the fuel pump symbol
indicates the fuel-filler location.
CAUTION
∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
After a few driving trips. the
light
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the ve-
hicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the modes of the trip computer
can be selected by pressing the
but-
ton on the steering wheel. The following
modes can be selected:
∙ Trip A
∙ Trip B
∙ ECO Pedal Indicator (if so equipped)
∙ Instant fuel economy
∙ Average fuel economy
∙ Average speed
∙ Distance to empty
∙ Trip computer reset
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2222
Instruments and controls 2-9
Trip symbol: A or B
Trip A
Measures the distance of one specific trip
䊊
1
.
Trip B
Measures the distance of a second specific
trip.
ECO Pedal Indicator Display (if so
equipped)
Use the ECO Pedal Indicator
䊊
1
for improv-
ing fuel economy.
When the ECO Pedal Indicator bar is in the
green range, it displays the recommended
accelerator pedal position to optimize fuel
economy.
If the ECO Pedal Indicator bar is out of the
green range, the vehicle will not provide
optimized fuel economy.
NOTE:
The ECO Pedal Indicator’s bar is not dis-
played when the cruise control is in op-
eration.
LIC3146 LIC2659
2-10 Instruments and controls
AVE & INST fuel economy
When Average & Instant fuel economy in-
formation is displayed, there will be differ-
ent sections to read:
䊊
A
Instant fuel economy (BAR graph)
䊊
B
Average fuel economy (BAR & DIGIT)
The bar graph is not displayed when ve-
hicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Instant fuel economy
The instant fuel economy mode shows the
instant fuel economy. The display updates
instantly when driving.
Average fuel economy
The average fuel economy mode shows
the average fuel economy since the last
reset. Resetting is done by pressing
the
button on the steering wheel for
more than approximately 1 second. The
display is updated every 30 seconds. At
about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset,
the display shows (----).
Average speed
The average speed mode shows the aver-
age vehicle speed since last reset. Reset-
ting is done by pressing the
button
on the steering wheel for more than ap-
proximately 1 second. The display is up-
dated every 30 seconds. The first 30 sec-
onds after a reset, the display shows (----).
Distance to empty
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides
you with an estimation of the distance that
can be driven before refueling. The dte is
constantly being calculated, based on the
amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the
actual fuel economy which will depend on
driving conditions. Dashes (—) indicate that
fuel remaining volume cannot be read by
the fuel pump and should be refilled as
soon as possible.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
LIC3147 LIC3148
Instruments and controls 2-11
NOTE:
When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
momentarily change the display.
Trip computer reset
To reset Trip A, Trip B, AVG/mpg, or
AVG/mph, go to the desired mode on the
trip computer and hold the
button on
the steering wheel for more than 3 sec-
onds.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
The outside temperature function pro-
vides a display of the outside temperature
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The display of positive temperatures is un-
signed (blank), negative temperatures are
prefixed with a minus sign.
The outside temperature will always be vis-
ible on the left side of the display.
LIC3149
2-12 Instruments and controls
or Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
or Power steering warning light
High beam indicator light (blue)
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
system warning light (if so equipped)
Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
or Brake warning light
Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped) Overdrive OFF indicator light
(if so equipped)
Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light
Door open warning light (if so equipped) Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light (CVT models)
(if so equipped)
Side light and headlight indicator light
(green)
Engine oil pressure warning light
(if so equipped)
Cruise main switch indicator light
(if so equipped)
Slip indicator light
Low fuel warning light (if so equipped) ECO mode indicator light (if so equipped) SPORT mode indicator light
(if so equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light Engine start operation indicator light
(if so equipped)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light
(if so equipped)
Front fog light indicator light (if so
equipped)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indi-
cator light
Master warning light (if so equipped) Front passenger air bag status light
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Instruments and controls 2-13
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:
, or , , or
The following lights (if so equipped) will
come on briefly and then go off:
or , , , , ,
SPORT ,
If any light does not come on or operate in
a way other than described, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-
function. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Some indicators and warnings are also dis-
played on the vehicle information display
between the speedometer and tachom-
eter. For additional information, refer to “Ve-
hicle information display” in this section.
WARNING LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings
and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in this section.
or Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without anti-
lock assistance. For additional information,
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) system
warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. It turns
off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the AEB system
is set to OFF on the vehicle information
display.
If the light illuminates when the AEB sys-
tem is on, it may indicate that the system is
unavailable. For additional information, re-
fer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
or Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the park-
ing brake is applied.
2-14 Instruments and controls
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine
is running, with the parking brake not ap-
plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-
lowing:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WARNING
∙ Your brake system may not be work-
ing properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to
the nearest service station for repairs.
Otherwise, have your vehicle towed
because driving it could be
dangerous.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the
brake warning light and the ABS warning
light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is
not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked and, if necessary, repaired.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed
driving and abrupt braking. For additional
information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-
tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging sys-
tem is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the generator belt. If
the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the
light remains on, have your vehicle serviced
immediately. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Door open warning light (if
so equipped)
This light comes on when any of the doors
are not closed securely while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Engine oil pressure
warning light (if so
equipped)
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If
the light flickers or comes on during nor-
mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,
stop the engine immediately and call a
NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair
shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For
Instruments and controls 2-15
additional information, refer to “Engine oil”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not cov-
ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as
soon as it is safe to do so.
Low fuel warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon
as it is convenient, preferably before the
fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be
a small reserve of fuel in the tank when
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty).
Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-
tors the tire pressure of all tires except the
spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about
1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illumi-
nate. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (vehicles
without a vehicle information display)
also appears in the trip computer or the
“Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” (vehicles
with a vehicle information display) ap-
pears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel located in the driver’s door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-
flated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
For vehicles without a vehicle information
display, the low tire pressure warning light
remains illuminated until the tires are in-
flated to the recommended COLD tire
pressure. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning
message is displayed each time the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON position as
long as the low tire pressure warning light
remains illuminated.
For vehicles with a vehicle information dis-
play, the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-
ing appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illumi-
nated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section, “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” and “In case of emer-
gency” sections of this manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
2-16 Instruments and controls
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning message
”/”Tire Pressure Low— Add Air” warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re-
sult in serious personal injury or
death. Check the tire pressure for all
four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
show on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label located in the driver’s
door opening to turn the low tire pres-
sure warning light off. If the light still
illuminates while driving after adjust-
ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat
or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire
is flat and all tires are properly in-
flated, have the vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash for ap-
proximately 1 minute. The light will re-
main on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
∙ Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Low windshield-washer
fluid warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the windshield-
washer fluid is at a low level. Add
windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For
additional information, refer to “Windshield-
washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
Master warning light (if so
equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion, the master warning light illuminates if
any of the following are displayed on the
vehicle information display:
∙ No key warning
∙ Low washer fluid warning
∙ Parking brake release warning
∙ Door open warning
∙ Loose fuel cap warning
∙ Check tire pressure warning
∙ Emergency brake warning
∙ Lock warning
∙ I-Key system warning
∙ Headlight system warning
∙ ITS warning
∙ Shipping mode warning
∙ Low oil pressure warning
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
or Power steering
warning light
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power as-
sist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine run-
ning, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light
illuminates. After starting the engine, the
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates the power steering system is op-
erational.
If the power steering warning light illumi-
nates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not
functioning properly and may need servic-
ing. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illu-
minates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten
your seat belts. The light illuminates when-
ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position and remains illuminated
2-18 Instruments and controls
until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the
same time, the chime sounds for about
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illumi-
nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat
is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, the sys-
tem does not activate the warning light for
the front passenger.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
Shift P (Park) warning light
(if so equipped)
This light blinks red and the key reminder
chime sounds if the shift lever is in any
position other than P (Park) and the ignition
switch is in the OFF position. Return the
shift lever to P (Park) with the ignition
switch in the OFF position and the light will
turn off. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position and the chime will turn off.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Supplemental air bag
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air
bag warning light illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off. This means
the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and pretensioner seat belt systems need
servicing.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 sec-
onds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services. Unless checked
and repaired, the supplemental restraint
system (air bag system) and/or the preten-
sioners may not function properly. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Supplemental
restraint system (SRS)” in the “Safety—
Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-
straint system” section of this manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag sys-
tems and/or pretensioner systems will
not operate in an accident. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle checked as soon as pos-
sible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light
(CVT models) (if so
equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator light shows the shift
lever position. For additional information,
refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Cruise indicator light (if so
equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control
ON/OFF switch is pushed. The light goes
out when the ON/OFF switch is pushed
again. When the cruise indicator light
comes on, the cruise control system is op-
erational. For additional information, refer
to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
ECO mode indicator light (if
so equipped)
This light comes on when the ECO mode
has been selected. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “ECO mode switch” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Engine start operation
indicator light (if so
equipped)
For vehicles equipped with push-button ig-
nition this indicator illuminates when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or
ON position with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models: This indicator means that
the engine will start by pushing the push-
button ignition switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
Manual transmission models: This indi-
cator means that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the clutch
and the brake pedal depressed
Front fog light indicator
light (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illumi-
nates when the front fog lights are on. For
additional information, refer to “Fog light
switch” in this section.
Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
off depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.
For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the head-
light high beams are on and goes out when
the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes
on when the passing signal is activated.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate a potential emission control mal-
function.
The MIL may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least
3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
light
should turn off if no other potential emis-
sion control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
2-20 Instruments and controls
test. For additional information, refer to
“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been de-
tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the
Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the
vehicle information display. If the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or
install the cap and continue to drive the
vehicle. The
light should turn off
after a few driving trips. If the
light
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. You do not need
to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.
∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
been detected which may damage the
emission control system. To reduce or
avoid emission control system dam-
age:
– do not drive at speeds above
45 mph (72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-
tion.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could lead to poor driveability, reduced
fuel economy, and possible damage to
the emission control system.
Overdrive OFF indicator
light (if so equipped)
The overdrive OFF indicator light illumi-
nates when the overdrive OFF mode is se-
lected.
For additional information, refer to “Driving
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
Security indicator light
For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This
light blinks whenever the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light
blinks when the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position with the key removed
from the ignition switch.
The blinking security indicator light indi-
cates that the security systems equipped
on the vehicle are operational.
For additional information, refer to “Security
systems” in this section.
Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light
illuminates when the side light or headlight
position is selected. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operat-
Instruments and controls 2-21
ing, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing
its traction limits. The road surface may be
slippery.
SPORT mode indicator
light (if so equipped)
This light illuminates and then turns off
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, and when the SPORT mode is se-
lected.
For additional information, refer to “SPORT
mode switch” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the
VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-
cates the VDC system has been turned off.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine and the system will operate
normally. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
The VDC indicator light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after
about 2 seconds if the system is opera-
tional. If the light stays on or comes on
along with the
indicator light while
you are driving, have the VDC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-
tem working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
replacement, it makes a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-
tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-
pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is
opened while the key is left in the ignition
switch. Remove the key and take it with you
when leaving the vehicle.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before
leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door
buzzer (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if
any one of the following improper opera-
tions is found.
∙ The ignition switch is not returned to
the LOCK position when locking the
doors.
∙ The Intelligent Key is left inside the ve-
hicle when locking the doors.
∙ The Intelligent Key is taken outside the
vehicle when operating the vehicle.
2-22 Instruments and controls
∙ Any doors are not closed securely when
locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For
additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-
telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set
and the vehicle is driven. The chime will
stop if the parking brake is released or the
vehicle speed returns to zero.
The vehicle information display is located
to the left of the speedometer. It displays
such items as:
∙ Vehicle settings
∙ Trip computer information
∙ Drive system warnings and settings
∙ Cruise control system information
∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation infor-
mation
∙ Indicators and warnings
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be
changed using the
, , ENTER
and
switches located on the steering
wheel.
䊊
1
— navigate through the items in
the vehicle information display
ENTER — change or select an item in
the vehicle information display
䊊
2
— go back to the previous menu
LIC2630 LIC3465
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if
so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-23
䊊
3
— select/enter the vehicle infor-
mation display menu items or to
change from one display screen to the
next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy)
The ENTER and
buttons also control
audio and control panel functions. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Steering
wheel switch for audio control” in the “Moni-
tor, climate, audio, phone and voice recog-
nition systems” section of this manual.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC
(if so equipped) position the screens that
display in the vehicle information include:
∙ Active system status (if so equipped)
∙ Trip computer
∙ Fuel economy
∙ Warnings
∙ Outside air temperature
∙ Odometer/Twin Trip Odometer
Warnings will only display if there are any
present. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display warnings and
indicators” in this section.
To control what items display in the vehicle
information display, refer to “Meter settings”
in this section.
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the
information displayed in the vehicle infor-
mation display:
∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
∙ Clock
∙ Meter Settings
∙ Vehicle Settings
∙ Maintenance
∙ Alarm
∙ Unit
∙ Language
∙ Factory Reset
2-24 Instruments and controls
Driver Assistance (if so equipped)
The driver assistance menu allows the user
to change the settings for the driving aids.
Menu item Result
Driving Aids Displays available Driving Aids.
Blind Spot/RCTA (if so equipped) Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional
information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Emergency Brake (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the emergency brake system on or off. For addition information, refer to “Automatic Emer-
gency Braking (AEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Clock
Menu item Result
Clock When selected, the following message appears: “Set Clock in Audio” (models without navigation) or “Set Clock
in NAVI” (models with navigation). For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in the “Monitor, climate,
audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual (models without navigation) or the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) (models with navigation).
Instruments and controls 2-25
Meter Settings
The meter settings allow the user to
change the settings for the vehicle infor-
mation display.
Menu item Result
Main Menu Selection Displays the available options.
Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Average Speed Allows user to turn the average speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Trip A Allows user to turn the trip A on or off in the vehicle information display.
Trip B Allows user to turn the trip B on or off in the vehicle information display.
Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy on or off in the vehicle information display.
Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer
to the separate “NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual”.
Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,
refer to “Audio system” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this
manual.
Driving Aids (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driving aids on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, re-
fer to “Driver assistance” in this section.
ECO Mode Settings Displays the available options for ECO mode settings.
ECO Indicator Allows the user to turn the ECO indicator on or off in the vehicle information display.
DISP Mode Allows user to select how the ECO mode in displayed.
Pedal Select to have the ECO mode shown as a pedal display.
Inst.FE Select to have the ECO mode shown as instant fuel economy.
ECO Drive Report Displays the available options for the ECO drive report.
Display Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off.
View History Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history.
Welcome Effect Displays the available options for the welcome effect.
Dial Effect Allows user to turn the dial effect on or off.
Display Effect Allows user to turn the display effect on or off.
2-26 Instruments and controls
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to
change the lighting and locking settings.
Menu item Result
Lighting Displays the available option for lighting.
Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.
Light sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.
Locking Displays the available locking options.
I-Key Door Lock Allows user to turn I-Key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.
Wipers (if so equipped) Displays the various wipers settings. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer switch” in this
section.
Speed Dependent Allows the user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to
set reminders for various vehicle mainte-
nance items.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, in-
cluding tire pressure checks. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Changing
wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. Many factors in-
cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving
habits and road conditions affect tire
wear and when tires should be re-
placed. Setting the tire replacement in-
dicator for a certain driving distance
does not mean your tires will last that
long. Use the tire replacement indicator
as a guide only and always perform
regular tire checks. Failure to perform
regular tire checks, including tire pres-
sure checks could result in tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to a collision, which could
result in serious personal injury or
death.
Menu item Result
Maintenance Displays various maintenance reminder options.
Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
2-28 Instruments and controls
Alarm
The alarm menu allows the user to set spe-
cific alarms for various items on the vehicle.
Menu item Result
Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off.
Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert alarm.
Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off.
Phone Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off.
Mail Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off.
Unit
The unit menu allows the user to change
the units shown in the vehicle information
display.
Menu item Result
Mileage Displays the available mileage display units.
Temperature Displays the available temperature display units.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Language
The language menu allows the user to
change the languages displayed in the ve-
hicle information display.
Menu item Result
Language Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.
Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to
restore the vehicle information display set-
tings to factory status.
Menu item Result
Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,
the user can confirm or deny the reset.
2-30 Instruments and controls
LIC3790
Instruments and controls 2-31
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
1. No Key Detected
2. Key ID Incorrect
3. Key Battery Low
4. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s
Manual
5. Shift to Park
6. Push brake and start switch to drive (if
so equipped)
7. Push clutch and start switch to drive (if
so equipped)
8. Engine start operation for Intelligent
Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
9. Release Parking Brake
10. Low Fuel
11. Loose Fuel Cap
12. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual
13. Low Washer Fluid
14. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air
15. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
16. Door Open
17. Alarm — Time for a break?
18. Power will turn off to save the battery
19. Power turned off to save the battery
20. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
21. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
22. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so
equipped)
23. BSW/RCTA System Malfunction: See
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)
24. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
25. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
26. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so
equipped)
27. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
28. Transmission Shift Position indicator
29. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
30. Illumination indicator
31. Outside Temperature Display
32. Low Outside Temperature
33. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if
so equipped)
34. ECO mode indicator (if so equipped)
No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni-
tion switch in the ON position. Make sure
the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition
switch is placed from the OFF position and
the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the
system. You cannot start the engine with
an unregistered key.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Key Battery Low
This indicator illuminates when the Intelli-
gent Key battery is running out of power.
2-32 Instruments and controls
If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat-
tery with a new one. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Battery replacement” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual
After the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, this light comes on for a period
of time and then turns off.
The I-Key System Error message warns of
a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys-
tem. If the light comes on while the engine
is stopped, it may be impossible to start
the engine.
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, you can drive the vehicle. However,
in these cases, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Shift to Park
This warning illuminates when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the
shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also,
a chime sounds when the ignition switch is
in the ACC or OFF position.
If this warning illuminates, move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position and start the
engine.
Push brake and start switch to drive (if
so equipped)
This indicator appears when the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with
the brake pedal depressed. You can start
the engine from any position of the ignition
switch.
Push clutch and start switch to drive (if
so equipped)
This indicator appears when the shift lever
is in the N (Neutral) position.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with
the clutch and brake pedal depressed. You
can start the engine from any position of
the ignition switch.
Engine start operation for Intelligent
Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of
the Intelligent Key is low and when the In-
telligent Key system and the vehicle are not
communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch
with the Intelligent Key while depressing
the brake pedal. For additional information,
refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis-
charge” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Release Parking Brake
This warning illuminates in the message
area of the vehicle information display
when the parking brake is set and the ve-
hicle is driven.
Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level
in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as
soon as it is convenient, preferably before
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There
will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank
when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0
(Empty).
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler
cap is not tightened correctly after the ve-
hicle has been refueled. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion of this manual.
Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears in the message area
of the vehicle information display if low oil
pressure is detected. This gauge is not de-
Instruments and controls 2-33
signed to indicate low oil level. The low oil
pressure warning is not designed to indi-
cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
Low Washer Fluid
This warning illuminates when the
windshield-washer fluid is at a low level.
Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.
For additional information, refer to
“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire
pressure warning light in the meter illumi-
nates and low tire pressure is detected. The
warning appears each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as long
as the low tire pressure warning light re-
mains illuminated. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres-
sures of all four tires to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional
information, refer to “Low tire pressure
warning light” in this section and “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when there is an er-
ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes
on, have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Door Open
This warning illuminates when a door has
been opened.
Alarm - Time for a driver break?
This indicator appears when the driver en-
ables the timer alert function within the
driver assistance settings and the selected
set time is expired. The time is based on
ignition on time and can be set up to six
hours.
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display after a period of time if the
ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON po-
sition and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For
additional information, refer to “Push-
button ignition switch positions” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition
switch is automatically turned off. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Push-button ig-
nition switch positions” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights
are left in the ON position when exiting the
vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the
OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.
Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the LED head-
lights are not functioning properly.
If this warning appears, have your system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
2-34 Instruments and controls
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so
equipped)
This indicator shows when the BSW and
RCTA systems are engaged.
For additional information, refer to “Blind
Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
BSW/RCTA System Malfunction: See
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the Blind Spot
Warning/Rear Cross Traffic Alert systems
are not functioning properly. For additional
information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning
(BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Blind
Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable
because a radar blockage is detected. For
additional information, refer to “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows the cruise control sys-
tem status.
When cruise control is activated, a green
circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The
vehicle information display will also display
the speed the cruise control was set at. If
you accelerate past the set speed, the
speed will blink until you either cancel
cruise control or go back to the set speed. If
cruise control is on and canceled, the
speed will be displayed to show the speed
the vehicle will return to if the resume but-
ton is activated.
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator
(if so equipped)
This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise
Control (ICC) system status. The status is
shown by the color. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this
warning appears, push in the extended
storage switch to turn off the warning. For
additional information, refer to “Fuses” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
Transmission Shift Position indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift
position.
CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
This warning illuminates when there is a
problem with the CVT system. If this warn-
ing comes on, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Illumination indicator
This indicator appears when the vehicle
information display screen brightness is
being adjusted.
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature display appears
in the center region of the vehicle informa-
tion display.
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside tem-
perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera-
ture can be changed to display in Celsius or
Fahrenheit. For additional information, re-
fer to “Settings” in this section.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if
so equipped)
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) system or the Auto-
matic Emergency Braking (AEB) system
becomes unavailable because the front ra-
dar is obstructed. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”
or “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
ECO mode indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows when the ECO mode
is engaged.
For additional information, refer to “ECO
mode” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Your vehicle may have two types of security
systems:
∙ Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audible alarm signals if someone
opens the doors when the system is
armed. It is not, however, a motion detec-
tion type system that activates when a ve-
hicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
The system helps detect vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-
nents in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the ignition, and
always lock the vehicle when unattended.
Be aware of your surroundings, and park in
secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protec-
tion, such as component locks, identifica-
tion markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and spe-
cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer
such equipment. Check with your insur-
ance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection
features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The
doors can be locked with:
LIC0301
SECURITY SYSTEMS
2-36 Instruments and controls
∙ the power door lock switch (if the
door is opened, locked and then
closed).
∙ the key — master or mechanical (In-
telligent Key models).
∙ any request switch (Intelligent Key
models).
∙ the key fob or Intelligent Key.
Key fob and Intelligent Key operation:
∙ Press the
button. All doors
lock. The hazard lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once to indicate
all doors are locked.
∙ When the
button is pressed
with all doors locked, the hazard
lights flash twice and the horn beeps
once as a reminder that the doors
are already locked.
The horn may or may not beep. For
additional information, refer to “Silenc-
ing the horn beep feature” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion in this manual.
4. Confirm that the
indicator light
comes on. The
light stays on for
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security
system is now pre-armed. After about
30 seconds the vehicle security system
automatically shifts into the armed
phase. The
light begins to flash
once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-
second pre-arm time period, the driv-
er’s door is unlocked by the key, a re-
quest switch, the key fob or Intelligent
Key, or if the ignition switch is placed in
the ACC or ON position, the system will
not arm.
∙ If the key is turned slowly when lock-
ing the driver’s door, the system may
not arm. Furthermore, if the key is
turned beyond the vertical position
toward the unlock position to remove
the key, the system may be disarmed
when the key is removed. If the indi-
cator light fails to glow for a period of
time, unlock the door once and lock it
again.
∙ Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
arm with all doors closed and locked
with the ignition switch placed in the
OFF position.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the
following alarm:
∙ The headlights blink and the horn
sounds intermittently.
∙ The alarm automatically turns off after
a period of time. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered
with again. The alarm can be shut off by
unlocking the driver’s door with the key,
a request switch, by pressing the
button on the key fob or Intelligent Key
or placing the ignition switch in the ON
or ACC position.
The alarm is activated by:
∙ opening a door without using the key, a
request switch, key fob or Intelligent Key
(even if the door is unlocked by using
the inside lock knob or the power door
lock switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driv-
er’s door by pressing the
button on
the key fob or Intelligent Key, or by unlock-
ing all doors with any request switch (Intel-
ligent Key models) or placing the ignition
switch in the ON or ACC position.
Instruments and controls 2-37
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of a registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an auto-
mated toll road device or automatic pay-
ment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the in-
terference) separate from the regis-
tered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Security indicator light
For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This
light blinks whenever the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light
blinks when the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position with the key removed
from the ignition switch.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System is operational.
LIC0474
2-38 Instruments and controls
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, the light will remain on
while the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System service as
soon as possible. Please bring all regis-
tered keys that you have when visiting a
NISSAN dealer for service.
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm the windshield
with the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer
fluid concentrates at full strength.
Some methyl alcohol based
windshield-washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufac-
turer’s recommended levels before
pouring the fluid into the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water.
LIC2789
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-39
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is in-
terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that
is on and around the wiper arms. In ap-
proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on
again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:
䊊
1
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-
eration can be adjusted by turning the
knob toward
䊊
A
(faster) or
䊊
B
(slower).
Also, the intermittent operation speed
varies in accordance with the vehicle
speed (if so equipped). (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the in-
termittent speed will be faster.)
䊊
2
Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-
eration
䊊
3
High (HI) — continuous high speed op-
eration
Push the lever up
䊊
4
to have one sweep
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you
䊊
5
to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
After a short delay the drip wipe function
will operate the wiper once more to clear
remaining windshield-washer fluid from
the windshield.
NOTE:
The Wiper with Speed feature may be
disabled. For additional information, re-
fer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
To defrost the rear window glass and out-
side mirror (if so equipped), start the engine
and push the rear window defroster switch
on. The rear window defroster indicator
light on the switch comes on. Push the
switch again to turn the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2324
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
2-40 Instruments and controls
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
䊊
1
Rotate the switch to the position,
and the front parking, tail, license plate,
and instrument panel lights will come
on.
䊊
2
Rotate the switch to the position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC2650
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3240
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3241
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-41
Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights
to be set so they turn on and off automati-
cally. The autolight system can:
∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,
tail, license plate and instrument panel
lights automatically when it is dark.
∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.
∙ Keep all the lights on a period of time
after you place the ignition switch in the
OFF position and all doors are closed.
NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity is adjust-
able for vehicles with navigation system.
For additional information, refer to “Ve-
hicle settings” in this section.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Place the headlight switch in the AUTO
position
䊊
1
.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position and a door is opened and left
open, the headlights remain on for a period
of time. If another door is opened while the
headlights are on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, place the
switch in the OFF,
,or position.
Type C (if so equipped)
LIC2127
WIC1437
2-42 Instruments and controls
Be sure you do not put anything on top
of the autolight sensor located in the top
side
䊊
1
of the instrument panel. The au-
tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it
is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as
if it is dark out and the headlights will
illuminate. If this occurs while parked
with the engine off and the ignition
switch placed in the ON position, your
vehicle’s battery could become dis-
charged.
Headlight beam select
䊊
1
To select the high beam function, en-
sure the low beams are engaged, and
push the lever forward. The high beam
lights come on and the blue
indi-
cator light illuminates.
䊊
2
Pull the lever back to return to the low
beam.
䊊
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high and low beams on
and off. The low beams need not be
engaged for this function.
Battery saver system
The battery saver system automatically
turns off the ignition after a period of time
when the ignition switch is left in the ACC or
ON position.
The battery saver system automatically
turns off the following lights after a period
of time when the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position and the doors are closed:
∙ Headlights, when the headlight switch
is in the
or position
∙ Interior lights, when left in the ON posi-
tion
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF position
when the engine is not running to avoid
discharging the vehicle battery.
LIC3578 LIC3250
Instruments and controls 2-43
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)
The headlights automatically illuminate at
100% intensity (low beam is used for the
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system)
when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The DRL operate with the
headlight switch in the OFF position. When
the DRL system is active, the clearance
lights, tail lights, front side marker lights,
and rear side marker lights are off. To turn
the DRL system off, turn the switch to
the
position.
When the headlight switch is placed in
the
position for full illumination when
driving at night there will be no difference in
the low beam intensity.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.
The DRL illuminate once the parking brake
is released. The DRL will remain on until the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch on for interior controls and switches
to illuminate, as those remain off while the
switch is in the OFF position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)
The headlights automatically illuminate at
100% intensity (low beam is used for the
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system)
when the engine is started and the parking
brake released. The DRL operate with the
headlight switch in the OFF position. When
the DRL system is active, the clearance
lights, tail lights, front side marker lights,
and rear side marker lights are off. To turn
the DRL system off, turn the switch to
the
position.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.
The DRL illuminate when the parking brake
is released. The DRL will remain on until the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch on for interior controls and switches
to illuminate, as those remain off while the
switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your head-
lights. Failure to do so could cause and
accident injuring yourself and others.
LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRL) SYSTEM (Type C — NISMO) (if
so equipped)
The LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) au-
tomatically illuminate at 100% intensity
when the engine is started and the parking
brake released. The LED DRL operate with
the headlight switch in the OFF position. To
turn off the LED DRL system, turn the head-
light switch to the
position.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi-
nate. The LED DRL illuminate when the
parking brake is released. The LED DRL will
remain on until the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch on for interior controls and switches
to illuminate, as those remain off while the
switch is in the OFF position.
2-44 Instruments and controls
WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your head-
lights. Failure to do so could cause an
accident injuring yourself and others.
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
Press the “+” button
䊊
A
to increase the
brightness of instrument panel lights.
Press the “-” button
䊊
B
to decrease the
brightness of instrument panel lights.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
䊊
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
completed, the turn signal cancels au-
tomatically.
Lane change signal
䊊
2
Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
completed.
LIC2418 LIC3252
Instruments and controls 2-45
Move the lever up or down until the
turn signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, and release the lever.
The turn signal will automatically flash
three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.
NOTE:
If the turn signal light bulb malfunctions,
the turn signal indicator will flash at a
higher frequency when the turn signal is
activated.
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so
equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
position, then turn the
fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position, the headlights
must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
the
position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low
beams selected for the fog lights to oper-
ate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are se-
lected.
LIC3256
2-46 Instruments and controls
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon
on the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-
tures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of
the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2419
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC1389
LIC3037
HORN HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-47
CAUTION
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-
tended periods or when no one is us-
ing the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion or seat cover, etc. Otherwise,
the seat may become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in dam-
age to the heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The front seats are warmed by built-in
heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermo-
stat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will re-
main on as long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is de-
pressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
OFF switch. The
indicator will come
on.
LIC3344
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)
2-48 Instruments and controls
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-
ing and driving” section of this manual.
The E-call (SOS) switch is used in combina-
tion with a NissanConnect® Services sub-
scription to call for assistance in case of an
emergency.
Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscrip-
tion) reach a response specialist that will
provide assistance based on the situation
described by the vehicle’s occupant. For ad-
ditional information, or to enroll your vehicle,
refer to www.NissanUSA.com/connect or
call 855–426–6628.
The power outlet is for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. It
is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
The power outlet is powered only when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
LIC3357 LIC3457
E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so
equipped)
POWER OUTLET
Instruments and controls 2-49
CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
∙ Only certain power outlets are de-
signed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power out-
let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the ve-
hicle battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear win-
dow defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned off.
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal tem-
perature fuse may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
FRONT-DOOR POCKETS
LIC2426
STORAGE
2-50 Instruments and controls
CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS (if so
equipped)
SEATBACK POCKETS (if so
equipped)
The seatback pockets are located on the
back of the driver’s (if so equipped) and
passenger’s seats. The pockets can be
used to store maps.
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, please observe the following
items:
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/headrest.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest, storage pouch (if
so equipped), or in the seatback
pocket.
LIC2392 LIC1328
Instruments and controls 2-51
STORAGE POUCH (if so equipped)
A storage pouch may be located on the
front of the driver’s and/or passenger’s
seats.
WARNING
∙ Do not store angular, sharp, heavy ob-
jects or objects that cannot fully fit
inside the pouch because they might
increase the likelihood of an injury in a
crash.
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, please observe the following
items:
∙ Do not place loads heavier than
0.55 lbs. (0.25 kg) on the cushion stor-
age pouch.
∙ Do not place a combined weight ex-
ceeding 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback,
head restraint, seatback pocket (if so
equipped) and storage pouch at the
same time.
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays
to help prevent injury in an accident or
sudden stop.
LIC2704
Storage Tray (if so equipped)
LIC3794
2-52 Instruments and controls
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
CONSOLE BOX
To open the console box, press in on the
lever
䊊
1
and raise the lid
䊊
2
.
To close, push the lid down until the lock
latches.
LIC2422 LIC3057 LIC3640
Instruments and controls 2-53
SLIDE FRONT ARMREST (if so
equipped)
To adjust the front armrest, push or pull the
console cover to slide it to the front or rear
as desired.
OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES
STORAGE
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the
holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to avoid obstructing the
driver’s view and to help prevent an
accident.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
LIC2652 LIC2312
2-54 Instruments and controls
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is
hot, it can scald you or your passenger.
CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liq-
uid containers.
Front cup holders
LIC2424
Rear cup holders (if so equipped)
LIC2656
Front bottle holder
LIC2423
Instruments and controls 2-55
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before closing
the windows. Use the window lock
switch to prevent unexpected use of
the power windows.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadver-
tent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the as-
sistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-
perature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ig-
nition switch is placed in the ON position, or
for a period of time after the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s
or passenger’s door is opened during this
period of time, the power to the windows is
canceled.
Driver’s side power window
switch
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger side switch
4. Right rear passenger side
5. Left rear passenger side
6. Driver side automatic switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close all of the
windows.
Rear bottle holder
LIC2425
LIC3208
WINDOWS
2-56 Instruments and controls
To open a window, push the switch and
continue to hold it down until the desired
window position is reached. To close a win-
dow, pull the switch and continue to hold it
up until the desired window position is
reached.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed,
only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger’s win-
dow. To open the window, push the switch
and continue to hold it down until the de-
sired window position is reached
䊊
1
.To
close the window, pull the switch and con-
tinue to hold it up until the desired window
position is reached
䊊
2
.
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding windows. To
open the window, push the switch and hold
it down
䊊
1
. To close the window, pull the
switch up
䊊
2
.
LIC2309 LIC2663
Instruments and controls 2-57
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with au-
tomatic operation, push the window
switch down to the second detent and re-
lease it; it need not be held. The window
automatically opens all the way. To stop
the window, lift the switch up while the win-
dow is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with au-
tomatic operation, pull the switch up to the
second detent and release it; it need not be
held. The window automatically closes all
the way. To stop the window, push the
switch down while the window is closing.
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be acti-
vated when a window is closed by auto-
matic operation.
Depending on the environment or driv-
ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-
tion may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., in-
side the vehicle before closing the
window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, re-
placed, or jump started, the power window
auto-reverse function may not operate
properly. Have the power window auto-
reverse system re-initialized. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
If the control unit detects something
caught in a window equipped with auto-
matic operation as it is closing, the window
will be immediately lowered.
When power window switch does
not operate
If the power window automatic function
(closing only) does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initial-
ize the power window system:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition.
2. Open the window more than halfway
by operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold
it to close the window, and then hold
the switch more than 3 seconds after
the window is closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Op-
erate the window by the automatic
function to confirm the initialization is
complete. The power window auto-
matically opens or closes depending
on if the automatic down or up func-
tion is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for
other windows.
If the power window function does not op-
erate properly after performing the above
procedure have the system checked and
repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LIC0410
2-58 Instruments and controls
POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The power moonroof is operational for a
period of time, even if the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the
driver’s door or the front passenger’s door
is opened during this period of time, the
power to the moonroof is canceled.
Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push
the switch to the open
䊊
2
or close
䊊
1
posi-
tion and release it; it need not be held. The
roof will automatically open or close all the
way. To stop the roof, push the switch once
more while it is opening or closing.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then
push the switch to the tilt up position
䊊
1
and release it; it need not be held. To tilt
down the moonroof, push the switch to the
tilt down position
䊊
2
.
Resetting the moonroof switch
If the moonroof does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initial-
ize the moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by
repeatedly pushing the moonroof
switch to the close position
䊊
1
to tilt the
moonroof up.
2. Push and hold the switch to the close
position
䊊
1
.
3. Release the moonroof switch after the
moonroof moves slightly up and down.
4. Push and hold the switch to the open
position
䊊
2
to fully tilt the moonroof
down.
5. Check if the moonroof switch operates
normally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly
after performing the procedure above,
have your vehicle serviced. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Auto-reverse function (when
closing or tilting down the
moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be acti-
vated when the moonroof is closed or
tilted down by automatic operation when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition or for a period of time after the igni-
tion switch is placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driv-
ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-
tion may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the moonroof occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., in-
side the vehicle before closing the
moonroof.
LIC2313
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-59
When closing
If the control unit detects something
caught in the moonroof as it moves to the
front, the moonroof will immediately open
backward.
When tilting down
If the control unit detects something
caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the
moonroof will immediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions
and repeats opening or tilting up the
moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down
switch within 5 seconds after it happens;
the moonroof will fully close gradually.
Make sure nothing is caught in the moon-
roof.
WARNING
∙ In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle through an open
moonroof. Always use seat belts and
child restraints.
∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out
of the moonroof opening while the
vehicle is in motion or while the
moonroof is closing.
CAUTION
∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the moonroof before
opening.
∙ Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it
forward or backward.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and re-
paired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
䊊
1
The interior light can be turned on re-
gardless of door position. The light will
go off after a period of time unless the
ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition when any door is opened.
䊊
2
The interior lights can be set to operate
when the doors are opened. To turn off
the interior lights when a door is open,
push the switch; the interior lights will not
illuminate, regardless of door position.
The lights will go off when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or the
driver’s door is closed and locked. The
lights will also go off after a period of time
when the doors are open.
LIC2302
INTERIOR LIGHTS
2-60 Instruments and controls
NOTE:
The step lights (if so equipped) illumi-
nate when the driver and passenger
doors are opened regardless of the inte-
rior light switch position. These lights
will turn off automatically after a period
of time while doors are open to prevent
the battery from becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)
The console light will turn on whenever the
parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
MAP LIGHTS
To turn the map lights on, push the
switches. To turn them off, push the
switches again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
LIC2303 LIC2304
Instruments and controls 2-61
DOME LIGHT
The interior light has a three-position
switch and operates regardless of ignition
switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position
䊊
1
,
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of
door position. The lights will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position.
When the switch is in the DOOR position
䊊
2
,
the interior lights will stay on for a period of
time when:
∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a
key, or the power door lock switch, while
all doors are closed and the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position.
∙ The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
∙ The key is removed from the ignition
switch while all doors are closed.
The lights will turn off while the timer is
activated when:
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key
fob, a key, or the power door lock switch.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
When the switch is in the OFF position
䊊
3
,
the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-
less of door position.
The lights will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to pre-
vent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
SIC2063A
2-62 Instruments and controls
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is
opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the
light goes off.
The light will go off after a period of time if
the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
For additional information, refer to “Exterior
and interior lights” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-
vides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual hand-
held transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
∙ Will operate most radio frequency de-
vices such as garage doors, gates,
home and office lighting, entry door
locks and security systems.
∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-
connected, HomeLink® will retain all
programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-
ceiver is programmed, retain the original
transmitter for future programming pro-
cedures (Example: new vehicle pur-
chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the
programmed HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver buttons should be erased for
security purposes. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Programming
HomeLink®” in this section.
WARNING
∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
verse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards
became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A
garage door opener which cannot de-
tect an object in the path of a closing
garage door and then automatically
stop and reverse, does not meet cur-
rent federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious
injury or death.
∙ During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people
or objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-63
∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be
turned off while programming the
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do
not breathe exhaust gases; they con-
tain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-
gerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion when programming HomeLink®. It is
also recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink® for quicker programming
and accurate transmission of the radio
frequency.
1. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink® surface, keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light
䊊
1
in view.
2. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button and hand-held transmitter but-
ton. DO NOT release until the
HomeLink® indicator light
䊊
1
flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-
cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. (The rapid flashing
indicates successful programming.)
LIC2365 LIC2366
2-64 Instruments and controls
NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted
in “Programming HomeLink® for Cana-
dian customers and gate openers” in this
section.
3. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the in-
dicator light.
∙ If the indicator light
䊊
1
is
solid/continuous, programming is
complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button
is pressed and released.
∙ If the indicator light
䊊
1
blinks rapidly
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue
with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de-
vice. A second person may make the
following steps easier. Use a ladder or
other device. Do not stand on your
vehicle to perform the next steps.
4. At the receiver located on the garage
door opener motor in the garage, lo-
cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the
name and color of the button may vary
by manufacturer but it is usually lo-
cated near where the hanging an-
tenna wire is attached to the unit). If
there is difficulty locating the button,
reference the garage door opener’s
manual.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”
button.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
and hold the trained HomeLink® but-
ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat
the “press/hold/release” sequence up
to three times to complete the training
process. HomeLink® should now acti-
vate your rolling code equipped device.
7. If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your
HomeLink® buttons, refer to the
HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE
OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
training. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-
eout” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
culties training a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Training” proce-
dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”
Step 2 with the following:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door
opener, etc., unplug the device during
the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener com-
ponents.
1. For additional information, refer to “Pro-
gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this
section.
2. Using both hands, simultaneously
press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. During training, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the desired HomeLink® button
while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every
2 seconds until the frequency signal
has been learned. The HomeLink® indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then
Instruments and controls 2-65
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training. DO NOT release un-
til the HomeLink® indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-
cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
may be released. The rapid flashing in-
dicates successful training.
Proceed with “Programming
HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.
If the device was unplugged during the
programming procedure, remember
to plug it back in when programming is
completed.
OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after
it is programmed, can be used to activate
the programmed device. To operate, sim-
ply press and release the appropriate pro-
grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans-
ceiver button. The amber indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being trans-
mitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device may also be used at any
time.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
DIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter bat-
teries with new batteries.
∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with
its battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink®
and hand-held transmitter buttons
without interruption.
∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 -
3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-
ter in that position for up to 15 seconds.
If HomeLink® is not programmed within
that time, try holding the transmitter in
another position – keeping the indicator
light in view at all times.
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
The following procedure clears the pro-
grammed information from both buttons.
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-
ever, individual buttons can be repro-
grammed. For additional information, refer
to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button” in this section.
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash in approximately
10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than
20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming
mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with “Programming
HomeLink®” - Step 1.
2-66 Instruments and controls
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-
ton has now been reprogrammed. The
new device can be activated by pressing
the HomeLink® button that was just pro-
grammed. This procedure will not affect
any other programmed HomeLink® but-
tons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device
that has been programmed into
HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of
each device or call the manufacturer or
dealer of those devices for additional infor-
mation.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-
versal Transceiver with your new trans-
mitter information.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
Instruments and controls 2-67
MEMO
2-68 Instruments and controls
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys.............................................3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) .......3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys..........................................3-4
Doors ...........................................3-5
Locking with key (if so equipped) .............3-5
Locking with inside lock knob.................3-6
Locking with power door lock switch .........3-6
Automatic door locks (if so equipped) ........3-7
Child safety rear door lock ....................3-7
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-8
How to use remote keyless entry
system .......................................3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ..........3-11
Operating range.............................3-13
Door locks/unlocks precaution ..............3-14
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation ...........3-14
How to use the remote keyless entry
function .....................................3-18
Warning lights and audible reminders .......3-21
Warning signals .............................3-21
Troubleshooting guide (Continuously
Variable Transmission only)..................3-23
Troubleshooting guide (manual
transmission only)...........................3-24
Hood ...........................................3-25
Trunk lid ........................................3-26
Trunk lid release switch......................3-26
Interior trunk lid release .....................3-26
Interior trunk access ........................3-27
Fuel-filler door ..................................3-27
Opener operation ...........................3-27
Fuel-filler cap ................................3-28
Steering wheel .................................3-30
Tilt operation ................................3-30
Telescopic operation ........................3-30
Sun visors ......................................3-30
Vanity mirrors ...............................3-31
Card holder (driver’s side only) ............... 3-31
Mirrors .........................................3-32
Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) ..............................3-32
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) ..............................3-32
Outside
mirrors .............................3-33
1. Integrated door lock key fob
2. Key number plate
CAUTION
Do not leave the ignition key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.
1. Intelligent Keys (two sets)
2. Mechanical key
3. Key number plate (one plate)
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to
your vehicle’s Intelligent Key components
and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
components.
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD2027
Type B (if so equipped)
LPD2076
KEYS
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The
new keys must be registered prior to use
with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. Since the registration pro-
cess requires erasing all memory in the
Intelligent Key components, when register-
ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent
Keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelli-
gent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-
gent Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely
dry.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID
code of that Intelligent Key from the ve-
hicle. This may prevent the unauthor-
ized use of the Intelligent Key to oper-
ate the vehicle. For information
regarding the erasing procedure, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechani-
cal key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the driver’s door.
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key in-
stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.
For additional information, refer to “Doors”
in this section.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the
keys which are registered to the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System components
in your vehicle.
A mechanical key can be used for all the
locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-
isting key can be duplicated without know-
ing the key number. As many as four
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should
bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer
for registration. This is because the regis-
tration process will erase the memory of all
key codes previously registered into the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After
the registration process, these compo-
nents will only recognize keys coded into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
during registration. Any key that is not
given to the dealer at the time of registra-
tion will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system
key, which contains an electrical tran-
sponder, to come into contact with wa-
ter or salt water. This could affect sys-
tem function.
SPA1951
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to
open the doors.
WARNING
∙ Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping to
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from unintention-
ally opening the doors, and will help
keep out intruders.
∙ Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows and/or inad-
vertent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others and/or pets un-
attended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and/or pets.
LOCKING WITH KEY (if so
equipped)
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.
Manual
To lock either the driver or passenger side
door, turn the key toward the front of the
vehicle
䊊
1
. To unlock, turn it toward the rear
䊊
2
.
Driver’s side
LPD2129
DOORS
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Power
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front
䊊
1
of the
vehicle locks all doors.
Turning the key one time toward the rear
䊊
2
of the vehicle unlocks that door. From
that position, returning the key to neutral
䊊
3
(where the key can only be removed and
inserted) and turning it toward the rear
again
䊊
4
within five seconds unlocks all
doors.
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the lock position
䊊
1
,
then close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move
the inside lock knob to the unlock position
䊊
2
.
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-
ger’s side) to the lock position
䊊
1
. When
locking the door this way, be certain not to
leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas-
senger’s side) to the unlock position
䊊
2
.
Driver’s side
LPD0461
Inside lock
SPA2726
Driver’s and passenger’s side
LPD2309
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch is moved
to the lock position and any door is open, all
doors will lock and unlock automatically.
With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle
while any door open, all doors will unlock
automatically and a chime will sound after
the door is closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelli-
gent Key from being accidentally locked
inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so
equipped)
∙ All doors lock automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 15 mph
(24 km/h).
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (if so equipped)
– All doors unlock automatically when
the transmission is placed in the P
(Park) position.
∙ Manual transmission (if so equipped)
– All doors unlock automatically when
the ignition is placed in the off posi-
tion.
∙ Vehicles not equipped with Intelligent
Key (if so equipped)
– All doors unlock automatically when
the transmission is placed in the P
(Park) position (if so equipped), the
ignition is turned to the OFF position
or when the key is removed from the
ignition.
NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can
be changed using the “Vehicle Settings”
of the vehicle information display. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual (if
so equipped).
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, es-
pecially when small children are in the ve-
hicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on
the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position
䊊
2
,
the door can be opened from the outside
or the inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position
䊊
1
,
the door can be opened only from the
outside.
LPD2570
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ The remote keyless entry key fob
transmits radio waves when the but-
tons are pressed. The FAA advises ra-
dio waves may affect aircraft naviga-
tion and communication systems. Do
not operate the remote keyless entry
key fob while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated un-
intentionally when the unit is stored
for a flight.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn
the interior lights on, and activate the panic
alarm by using the key fob from outside the
vehicle.
Be sure to remove the key from the ve-
hicle before locking the doors.
The key fob can operate at a distance of
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
The effective distance depends on the
conditions around the vehicle.
As many as four key fobs can be used with
one vehicle. For information concerning
the purchase and use of additional key
fobs, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
The key fob will not function when:
∙ The battery is discharged.
∙ The distance between the vehicle and
the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).
The panic alarm will not activate when
the key is in the ignition switch.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the key fob:
∙ Do not allow the key fob, which con-
tains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water.
This could affect the system function.
∙ Do not drop the key fob.
∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply
against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.
∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If
the key fob gets wet, immediately
wipe until it is completely dry.
∙ Do not place the key fob for an ex-
tended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the key fob near equip-
ment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
ommends erasing the ID code of that
key fob. This will prevent the key fob
from unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding the
erasing procedure, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking the doors
1. Remove the ignition key.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Press the
button on the key fob.
∙ All the doors will lock.
∙ The hazard indicator flashes twice and
the horn beeps once.
NOTE:
An auto-relock function will operate af-
ter a full or partial unlock, when no fur-
ther user action occurs. The relock will
operate approximately 1 minute after
full or partial unlock. The auto-relock
function is canceled when any door is
opened or the key is inserted into the
ignition.
Unlocking the doors
1. Press the button on the key fob to
unlock the driver’s door.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the
button again within
5 seconds to unlock all doors.
LPD2028 LPD2029
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Releasing the trunk lid
Press the button on the key fob for
longer than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk
lid. The trunk release button on the key fob
will not operate when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
the
button on the key fob for longer
than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm will stay on for a period of
time.
The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time.
∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.
Using the interior light
Press the button on the key fob once
to turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior
lights” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
LPD2030 LPD2031
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be
deactivated using the key fob.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three
times to confirm that the horn beep fea-
ture has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reac-
tivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-
gered.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and com-
munication systems. Do not operate
the Intelligent Key while on an air-
plane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all
the door locks using the remote control
function or pushing the request switch on
the vehicle without taking the key out from
a pocket or purse. The operating environ-
ment and/or conditions may affect the In-
telligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using
the Intelligent Key system.
LPD2032
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
CAUTION
∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehicle.
∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicat-
ing with the vehicle as it receives radio
waves. The Intelligent Key system trans-
mits weak radio waves. Environmental
conditions may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Intelligent Key system under the
following operating conditions:
∙ When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted,
such as a TV tower, power station and
broadcasting station.
∙ When in possession of wireless equip-
ment, such as a cellular telephone,
transceiver or a CB radio.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact
with or covered by metallic materials.
∙ When any type of radio wave remote
control is used nearby.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near
an electric appliance such as a personal
computer.
∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park-
ing meter.
In such cases, correct the operating condi-
tions before using the Intelligent Key func-
tion or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies de-
pending on the operating conditions, the
battery’s life is approximately two years. If
the battery is discharged, replace it with a
new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the
Intelligent Key system warning light (
)
will blink green for about 30 seconds after
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-
ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near
equipment which transmits strong radio
waves, such as signals from a TV and per-
sonal computer, the battery life may be-
come shorter.
For information regarding replacement of
a battery, refer to “Battery replacement” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. For
information about the purchase and use of
additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelli-
gent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-
gent Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely
dry.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-
gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-
mation regarding the erasing procedure, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the request
switch
䊊
1
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key operating range becomes narrower,
and the Intelligent Key may not function
properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in
(80 cm) from each request switch
䊊
1
.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-
ating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelli-
gent Key, to push the request switch to
lock/unlock the doors.
LPD2402
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
∙ Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in
your hand as illustrated. The close dis-
tance to the door handle will cause the
Intelligent Key system to have difficulty
recognizing that the Intelligent Key is
outside the vehicle.
∙ After locking with the door handle re-
quest switch, verify the doors are se-
curely locked by testing them.
∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-
ing left inside the vehicle, make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you and
then lock the doors.
∙ Do not pull the door handle before
pushing the door handle request
switch. The door will be unlocked but
will not open. Release the door handle
once and pull it again to open the door.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors and trunk
lid without taking the Intelligent Key out of
your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock all doors and trunk
lid by pushing the door handle request
switch within the range of operation.
LPD2554 LPD2399
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion (Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion only), place the ignition switch in
the LOCK position and make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch
䊊
1
while carrying the Intelligent Key
with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the outside chime sounds twice.
NOTE:
∙ Doors and trunk lid lock with the door
handle request switch while the ignition
switch is not in the LOCK position.
∙ Doors and trunk lid do not lock by push-
ing the door handle request switch
while any door is open. However, doors
lock with the mechanical key even if any
door is open.
∙ Doors and trunk lid do not lock with the
door handle request switch with the In-
telligent Key inside the vehicle; a beep
sounds to warn you. However, when an
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle,
doors can be locked with another Intel-
ligent Key.
CAUTION
∙ After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure that the
doors have been securely locked by
operating the door handle or the
trunk opener switch.
∙ When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession be-
fore operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been de-
tected by the Intelligent Key system.
LPD2075 LPD2165
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the
doors are locked and then the Intelligent
Key is put inside the vehicle and all the
doors are closed; the lock will automati-
cally unlock and the door buzzer sounds.
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is op-
erating the request switch to lock the
door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,
pocket or your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not func-
tion under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
or under the spare tire area.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch
䊊
1
.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once
and the outside chime sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch
䊊
1
again within 1 minute to unlock all
doors and the trunk lid.
LPD2400
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking
the doors, that door may not be unlocked.
Returning the door handle to its original
position will unlock the door. If the door
does not unlock after returning the door
handle, push the door handle request
switch to unlock the door.
All doors and trunk lid will be locked auto-
matically unless one of the following op-
erations is performed within 1 minute after
pushing the request switch.
∙ Opening any door or the trunk lid.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for a pe-
riod of time when a door is unlocked and
the room light switch is in the DOOR posi-
tion.
The interior light can be turned off without
waiting by performing one of the following
operations.
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition.
∙ Locking the doors with the remote con-
trol.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
Opening the trunk lid
1. Push the trunk opener request switch
䊊
A
for more than 1 second while carry-
ing the Intelligent Key with you.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will
sound four times.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key.
LPD2165 LPD2122
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
When all doors are locked and the trunk lid
is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the
trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the
trunk will open.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can op-
erate all door locks using the remote key-
less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-
mote keyless function can operate at a
distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-
hicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not
function under the following conditions:
∙ The Intelligent Key is not within the op-
erational range.
∙ The doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
∙ The Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intel-
ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the
button on the Intelli-
gent Key.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once.
5. All doors and the trunk lid will be locked.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intel-
ligent Key, be sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles.
WPD0359
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Unlocking doors
1. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key to unlock the driver’s door.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the
button again within
1 minute to unlock all doors and trunk
lid.
All doors and trunk lid will be locked auto-
matically unless one of the following op-
erations is performed within 1 minute after
pressing the
button:
∙ Opening any doors or trunk lid.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the
room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following opera-
tions:
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition.
∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent
Key.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
Releasing the trunk lid
Press the button for longer than
0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk
release button will not operate when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
WPD0360 WPD0364
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
the
button on the Intelligent Key for
longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time, or
∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
Key.
∙ The request switch on the driver or pas-
senger door is pushed and the Intelli-
gent Key is in range of the door handle.
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be
deactivated using the Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three
times to confirm that the horn beep fea-
ture has been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
WPD0361 WPD0362
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The hazard warning lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been reac-
tivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-
gered.
䊊
1
P (Park) position selecting warning
light
䊊
2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning
light
WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE
REMINDERS
The Intelligent Key is equipped with a func-
tion that is designed to minimize improper
operations and to help prevent the vehicle
from being stolen. The warning buzzer
sounds and the warning light illuminates
when improper operations are detected.
CAUTION
When the buzzer sounds and the warn-
ing light illuminates, be sure to check
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
vehicle from being stolen, a chime or
buzzer sounds from inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning light comes on in the
instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or the warn-
ing light comes on, be sure to check the
vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
LPD2572
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Audible reminder and warning
when locking the doors (if so
equipped)
When the chime or buzzer sounds from
inside and outside the vehicle, check for
the following:
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position.
∙ The Intelligent Key is not left inside the
vehicle.
∙ The shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
Audible reminder and warning
when the engine stops (if so
equipped)
When the P position selecting warning light
(
) in the instrument panel blinks in red:
∙ Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
When the chime sounds intermittently:
∙ Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position and the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position.
If the chime sounds continuously when the
driver’s door is opened, check the following:
∙ The shift lever is placed in the P (Park)
position and the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position.
∙ The warning chime may stop when one
of the following is performed:
– Returning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position.
– Closing the doors.
Alarm and warning when the
engine starts
When the Intelligent Key system warning
light (
) blinks red and the outside
buzzer sounds, make sure the Intelligent
Key is inside the vehicle.
Warning for low battery power
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the
Intelligent Key system warning light (
)
will blink green for about 30 seconds after
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition. This warning is to let you know that
the battery of the Intelligent Key will run
down soon. Replace it with a new one. For
additional information, refer to “Battery re-
placement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for battery replacement.
Preventing the Intelligent Key
from being left in the vehicle
If you lock all doors using the power door
lock switch with the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle, all of the doors unlock immediately
and the buzzer will warn you when the door
is closed.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(Continuously Variable
Transmission only)
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When pushing the ignition switch to
stop the engine
The P (Park) warning light in the instru-
ment panel illuminates and the inside
chime sounds continuously.
The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
position.
Make sure that the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When pushing the door handle re-
quest switch to lock the door
The outside chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
When closing the doors The P (Park) warning light in the instru-
ment panel illuminates and the out-
side chime sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or
OFF position and the shift lever is not
in the P (Park) position.
Make sure that the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position and place the ignition
switch in the OFF position.
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or
trunk.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When closing the trunk lid
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
mately 10 seconds and the trunk lid
opens.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
When pressing the
button on
the Intelligent Key to the lock the door
The outside chime sounds for a few
seconds and all the doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
A door is not closed securely. Close the doors securely.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(manual transmission only)
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When the parking brake is fully applied The inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When pushing the door handle re-
quest switch to lock the door
The outside chime sounds for a few
seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
When closing the doors
The key warning light in the instru-
ment panel blinks in yellow, the out-
side chime sounds three times and
the inside warning chime sounds for
approximately 3 seconds.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or
trunk.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
When pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine
The key warning light in the instru-
ment panel blinks in green.
The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one.
For additional information, refer to
“Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
1. Pull the hood lock release handle
䊊
1
located below the instrument panel
until the hood springs up slightly.
2. Locate the lever
䊊
2
in between the
hood and grille and push the lever side-
ways with your fingertips.
3. Raise the hood
䊊
3
.
4. Remove the support rod
䊊
4
and insert
it into the slot marked by an arrow
䊊
5
.
NOTE:
Do not place the support rod in a location
other than the designated slot.
Hold the coated parts
䊊
A
when removing
or resetting the support rod. Avoid direct
contact with the metal parts, as they
may be hot immediately after the engine
has been stopped.
When closing the hood, return the support
rod to its original position, lower the hood
to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the
latch and release it. This allows proper en-
gagement of the hood latch.
WARNING
∙ Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood
to fly open and result in an accident.
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.
LPD2413
HOOD
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH
WARNING
∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Ex-
haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
∙ Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
rear seatback and trunk lid securely
latched when not in use, and prevent
children’s access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid, push the opener
switch down in the direction of the arrow
as illustrated.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the
trunk lid down securely.
NOTE:
You can open the trunk lid with the Intel-
ligent Key. For additional information,
refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in this
section.
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
Instrument panel
LPD2119
LPD2558
TRUNK LID
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The interior trunk lid release mechanism
provides a means of escape for children
and adults in the event they become
locked inside the trunk.
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the
illuminated release handle until the lock re-
leases and push up on the trunk lid. The
release handle is made of a material that
glows in the dark after a brief exposure to
ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk com-
partment on the interior of the trunk lid.
INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS
The trunk can be accessed from the pas-
senger side of the rear seat.
1. Move the front passenger seat to the
most forward position.
2. Open the access cover on the rear par-
cel shelf.
3. Push down on the button on the rear
parcel shelf.
4. Fold down the passenger’s side seat-
back.
WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seat when it
is in the fold-down position. Use of
these areas by passengers without
proper restraints could result in seri-
ous injury or death in an accident or
sudden stop.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched po-
sition. If they are not completely se-
cured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
∙ Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
rear seatback and trunk lid securely
latched when not in use, and prevent
children’s access to car keys.
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below
the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler
door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel-
filler door securely.
LPD2658
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seri-
ously injured if it is misused or mis-
handled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames or
sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.
∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
fuel spray and possibly a fire.
∙ Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
a built-in safety valve needed for
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An in-
correct cap can result in a serious mal-
function and possible injury. It could
also cause the
Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) to come on.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.
∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Fuel
recommendation” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.
∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-
sage will appear if the fuel-filler cap is
not properly tightened. It may take a
few driving trips for the message to
be displayed. Failure to tighten the
fuel-filler cap properly after the
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message
appears may cause the
Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) to
illuminate.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the
Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-
nate. If the
light illuminates be-
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle.
The
light should turn off after a
few driving trips. If the
light does
not turn off after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion of this manual.
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-
wise to remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
䊊
1
while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in
the odometer or vehicle information dis-
play (if so equipped) when the fuel-filler cap
is not tightened correctly after the vehicle
has been refueled. It may take a few driving
trips for the message to be displayed. To
turn off the warning, do the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
previously described as soon as pos-
sible.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
LPD2125
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD2124
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
3. Press the button
䊊
A
on the steer-
ing wheel for about 1 second to turn off
the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
䊊
B
after
tightening the fuel-filler cap.
TILT OPERATION
Pull the lock lever down
䊊
1
and adjust the
steering wheel up or down
䊊
2
to the de-
sired position.
Push the lock lever up
䊊
1
firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.
TELESCOPIC OPERATION
Pull the lock lever down
䊊
1
and adjust the
steering wheel forward or backward
䊊
3
to
the desired position.
Push the lock lever up
䊊
1
firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.
䊊
1
To block glare from the front, swing
down the sun visor.
䊊
2
To block glare from the side, remove
the sun visor from the center mount
and swing the visor to the side.
Type B (if so equipped)
LPD2398
LPD2123
WPD0315
STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
䊊
3
Slide the extension sun visor in or out
as needed.
CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-
turning the extension to its original
position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcibly downward.
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover.
Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and
turn on when the mirror cover is open.
CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)
To access the card holder, pull the sun visor
down and slide card in the card holder. Do
not view information while operating the
vehicle.
LPD2573 LPD2120
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
MIRROR (if so equipped)
Use the night position
䊊
1
to reduce glare
from the headlights of vehicles behind you
at night.
Use the day position
䊊
2
when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it au-
tomatically dims according to the intensity
of the headlights of the vehicle following
you. The automatic anti-glare feature is ac-
tivated when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sen-
sors
䊊
1
or apply glass cleaner to the sen-
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensors, resulting in improper op-
eration.
The indicator light
䊊
3
will illuminate when
the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-
ing.
WPD0126
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD2418
Type B (if so equipped)
LPD2411
MIRRORS
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Type B (if so equipped)
∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
and hold the O button for 3-6 seconds.
The indicator light will turn off.
∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
and hold the | button for 3-6 sec-
onds. The indicator light will turn on.
For additional information on HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver operation, refer to
“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will op-
erate only when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position.
Move the small switch
䊊
1
to select the right
or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de-
sired position using the large switch
䊊
2
.
Move the switch to the center (neutral) po-
sition to prevent accidentally moving the
mirror.
WARNING
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the in-
side mirror or glance over your shoul-
der to properly judge distances to
other objects.
∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-
ing. You could lose control of your ve-
hicle and cause an accident.
LPD0237
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
Manual folding outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to
defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-
ibility. For additional information, refer to
“Rear window and outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
LPD2112
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..............4-4
How to use the touch-screen.................4-5
HowtousetheBACKbutton .................4-7
How to use the [
]button...............4-7
button..................................4-9
How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL
(volume) control knob ........................4-9
How to use the CAMERA button ..............4-9
RearView Monitor ..............................4-10
RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-11
How to read the displayed lines..............4-12
Difference between predicted and
actual distances.............................4-12
Adjusting the screen ........................4-14
RearView Monitor system limitations ........4-15
System maintenance........................4-16
Vents...........................................4-17
Heater (manual) (if so equipped) ................4-17
Controls .....................................4-19
Heater operation ............................4-19
Air flow charts ...............................4-20
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) .................................4-23
Controls .....................................4-24
Heater operation ............................4-25
Air conditioner operation ....................4-26
Air flow charts ...............................4-27
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) .................................4-31
Automatic operation ........................4-32
Manual operation ...........................4-33
Operating tips ...............................4-34
Servicing air conditioner (if so equipped)........4-34
Audio system...................................4-34
Radio........................................4-34
FM radio reception ..........................4-35
AM radio reception ..........................4-35
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .....4-35
Audio operation precautions ................4-36
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player (if so equipped) .......................4-43
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (Type A) (if so equipped) ..........4-48
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player (Type B) (if so equipped) ..........4-53
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) .....................4-59
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port (models with Navigation System)
(if so equipped) ..............................4-61
iPod®* player operation without
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-63
iPod®* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped)......................4-66
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-69
Bluetooth® streaming audio with
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-70
CD care and cleaning........................4-71
Steering wheel switch for audio control......4-72
Antenna.....................................4-73
NissanConnect® Mobile Apps (if so equipped). . . 4-74
Registering with NissanConnect®
Mobile Apps .................................4-74
Connect phone..............................4-74
Application download .......................4-74
NissanConnect® Services (if so equipped) ......4-75
Siri® Eyes Free ..................................4-75
Requirements ...............................4-75
Siri® activation...............................4-76
Operating Siri® Eyes Free ....................4-76
Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings
(models without navigation system) .........4-77
Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings
(models with navigation system) ............4-77
Troubleshooting guide ......................4-78
Car phone or CB radio ..........................4-79
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
without Navigation System (if so equipped).....4-79
Regulatory information ......................4-81
Using the system............................4-82
Control buttons .............................4-83
Connecting procedure ......................4-84
Voice commands ...........................4-85
Making a call ................................4-86
Receiving a call ..............................4-87
During
a call .................................4-87
Ending a call.................................4-88
Text messaging (if so equipped) .............4-88
Bluetooth® settings .........................4-90
Manual control ..............................4-91
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) .............4-91
Regulatory information ......................4-93
Voice commands ...........................4-94
Connecting procedure ......................4-94
Vehicle phonebook ..........................4-94
Making a call ................................4-95
Receiving a call ..............................4-95
During a call .................................4-95
Ending a call.................................4-95
Text messaging (if so equipped) .............4-95
Bluetooth® settings .........................4-98
Phone settings ..............................4-99
Troubleshooting guide .....................4-100
Nissan Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) ................................4-101
Using the system...........................4-101
System features ............................4-102
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands...........................4-103
Navigation System voice commands .......4-104
Audio system voice commands ............4-104
Information voice commands ..............4-105
My Apps voice commands .................4-105
Help voice commands......................4-105
Troubleshooting guide .....................4-106
WARNING
∙ Positioning of the heating or air con-
ditioning controls and display con-
trols should not be done while driving
in order that full attention may be
given to the driving operation.
∙ Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in acci-
dents, fire, or electrical shock.
∙ Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in acci-
dent, fire or electric shock.
∙ In case you notice any foreign object
in the system hardware, spill liquid on
it, or notice smoke or smell coming
from it, stop using the system imme-
diately. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
1. MAP button*
2. Display screen
3.
button**
4.
button
5.
(brightness control) button
6. BACK button
7. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control
knob
8. CAMERA button
LHA2898
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR
SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
9. NAV button*
* For additional information regarding the
navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual.
** For additional information regarding the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
control button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System with navigation sys-
tem” in this section.
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and
the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer
to a key shown only on the display. These
keys can be selected by touching the
screen.
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION
∙ The glass display screen may break if
it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If
the glass screen breaks, do not touch
it. Doing so could result in an injury.
∙ To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Con-
tact with liquid will cause the system
to malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not avail-
able while driving will be “grayed out” or
muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
operate the navigation system.
WARNING
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
∙ Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted, you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Touch-screen operation
Menu Item Result
Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Touch the BACK button to
return to the previous screen.
Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page. Touch
the down arrow to scroll down the page.
Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.
Space Inserts a space.
Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the
characters.
OK Completes the character input.
LHA3748
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-
sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-
gent with a soft cloth. Never spray the
screen with water or detergent. Dampen
the cloth first and then wipe the screen.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
Press the BACK button to return to the pre-
vious screen.
HOW TO USE THE [ ] BUTTON
For additional information about the
“SiriusXM Travel Link”, and “SiriusXM Traffic”
features, refer to the separate
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
For additional information about the “My
Apps” key, refer to “NissanConnect® Mobile
Apps” in this section.
For additional information about the “Voice
Commands” key, refer to “NISSAN Voice
Recognition System” in this section.
Designs and button layout may vary de-
pending on specifications and the model.
To select and/or adjust several functions,
features and modes that are available for
your vehicle:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.
LHA3747 LHA3748
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
Menu item Result
Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Traffic Touch this key to display traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional op-
tions will appear.
Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.
Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.
Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night”
modes are suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.
Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.
Clock/Date Touch this key to adjust the time.
Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Date Format Select from five possible formats of displaying the day, month, and year.
Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time.
“Manual” allows you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. “Time Zone” will set the clock
to match the time zone selected from the option below.
Set Clock/Date Manually Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year
up or down. “Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.
Daylight Savings Time Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off. “Clock Mode” must be set to Time Zone for this option to
be available.
Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list. “Clock Mode” must be set to Time Zone for this option
to be available.
Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.
NissanConnect Services Settings (if so equipped) Touch this key to change the NissanConnect® services setting options.
Sync All Information Feeds Touch the yes or no key to sync all feeds.
Share Driver Information For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Delete History Select Yes or No to delete NissanConnect® Services history.
Unit ID Information Touch this key to show Unit ID information
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Menu item Result
Vehicle Data Transmission Setting For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
Camera Settings Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).
Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness of the RearView Monitor screen.
Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast of the RearView Monitor screen.
Color Adjust touch-screen color of the RearView Monitor screen.
Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).
Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every
time a key on the screen is touched.
System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a
pop-up message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the
button) is
pressed and held for 2 seconds.
Return to Factory Settings/Clear Memory Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Minimize Voice Feedback Touch this key to turn ON or OFF the control voice feedback.
Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System”
in this section.
SXM Touch this key to display SXM status information. For additional information regarding SXM setup,
refer to “Audio System” in this section.
BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the auto or the
night display.
If no operation is performed within 5 sec-
onds, the display will return to the previous
display.
Press and hold the
button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press
the button again to turn the display on.
HOW TO USE THE ON-OFF
BUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROL
KNOB
Press the ON-OFF button to turn audio
function on and off. Turn the volume con-
trol knob to adjust audio volume.
HOW TO USE THE CAMERA
BUTTON
For additional information, refer to “Rear-
View Monitor” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
1. CAMERA button (if so equipped)
LHA3884
REARVIEW MONITOR
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the Rear-
View Monitor system could result in
serious injury or death.
∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience
feature and is not a substitute for
proper backing. Always turn and look
out the windows and check mirrors to
be sure that it is safe to move before
operating the vehicle. Always back up
slowly.
∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to
help avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The distance guide line and the ve-
hicle width line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle
and displayed objects.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automati-
cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when
the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position. Press the CAMERA button (if so
equipped) while in the R (Reverse) position
to cycle through guideline options. The ra-
dio can still be heard while the RearView
Monitor is active.
To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-
tor system uses a camera located just
above the vehicle’s license plate
䊊
1
.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
sition to operate the RearView Monitor.
LHA3819
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with refer-
ence to the vehicle body line
䊊
A
are dis-
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
∙ Red line
䊊
1
: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Yellow line
䊊
2
: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Green line
䊊
3
: approx. 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line
䊊
4
: approx. 10 ft (3 m)
Vehicle width guide lines
䊊
5
Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
ally located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.
LHA2944
LHA4011
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up near a projecting
object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the
object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the
actual backing up course.
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The position
䊊
C
is shown farther than the
position
䊊
B
in the display. However, the po-
sition
䊊
C
is actually at the same distance as
the position
䊊
A
. The vehicle may hit the
LHA4012 LHA2946 LHA4013
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
object when backing up to the position
䊊
A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the display
settings of the screen differs depending on
the type of screen present on the vehicle.
For vehicles without navigation system:
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (Reverse).
2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
3. The screen will display the Brightness
settings.
4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the set-
ting up or down.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button
again to display the Contrast settings.
6. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER or
TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the set-
ting up or down.
7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to
complete the adjustment.
Models without navigation system
LHA3639
Models with navigation system
LHA3679
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
For vehicles with navigation system:
1. Firmly apply the brake and place the
shift lever in R (Reverse).
2. Press the
button on the control
panel.
3. The screen will display the Night set-
tings.
4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set-
ting up or down.
5. Press the
button again to access
the Auto settings.
6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set-
ting up or down.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the ve-
hicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
∙ The system cannot completely elimi-
nate blind spots and may not show
every object.
∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-
ner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor be-
cause of its monitoring range limita-
tion. The system will not show small
objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bumper
or on the ground.
∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance be-
cause a wide-angle lens is used.
∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and out-
side mirrors.
∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, ve-
hicle position, road conditions and
road grade.
∙ Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled above the license plate.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage result-
ing in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong re-
flected light from the bumper.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-
cent light.
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark environment.
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the cam-
era.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera
䊊
1
, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-
ing it with a dry cloth.
LHA3819
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.
Open or close the vents by using the dial.
Move the dial toward the
to open the
vents or toward the
to close them.
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the inte-
rior air to become stale and the win-
dows to fog up.
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-
hicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
LHA4299
VENTS HEATER (manual) (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recir-
culation to allow fresh air into the pas-
senger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.
1.
Fan control / system OFF dial
2. Air flow control buttons
3. Temperature control dial
4.
Air recirculation button
5.
Rear window and outside mir-
ror (if so equipped) defroster
switch
6.
Front windshield defroster
button
LHA4253
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on
and off and controls fan speed.
Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to
select the air flow outlets.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and the front and rear
floor outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the front
and rear floor outlets.
— Air flows from defroster out-
lets and the front and rear
floor outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right.
Air recirculation button
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the
button to the ON position
when:
∙ driving on a dusty road.
∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
passenger compartment.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment and distributed through the
selected outlet.
Use the OFF position for normal heater op-
eration.
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from
the defrost outlets and the side vent out-
lets.
1. Press the
button to the OFF posi-
tion for normal heating.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side
and center vents.
1. Press the
button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the de-
sired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the
defrost/defog button.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
windows, turn the
fan control dial
to the highest setting and the tempera-
ture control to the full HOT position.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to
the side and center vents and to the front
and rear floor outlets.
1. Press the
button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windshield.
1. Press the
air flow control button.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, defrosting or defogging. The air
recirculation button should always be in
the OFF position for heating and defrost-
ing.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4400 LHA4401
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
LHA4402 LHA4403
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the inte-
rior air to become stale and the win-
dows to fog up.
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-
hicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recir-
culation to allow fresh air into the pas-
senger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
1.
Fan control / system OFF dial
/ A/C (air conditioner) button
2. Air flow control buttons
3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C
button
4.
Air recirculation button
5.
Rear window and outside mir-
ror (if so equipped) defroster
switch
6.
Front windshield defroster
button
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on
and off, and controls fan speed.
Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to
select the air flow outlets.
MAX
A/C
— Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster out-
lets and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from de-
froster outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right.
LHA2243
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Air recirculation button
ON position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the
button to the ON position
when:
∙ driving on a dusty road.
∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering
passenger compartment.
∙ for maximum cooling when using the
air conditioner.
The air recirculation function does not op-
erate when in the
or air flow
modes.
OFF position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger
compartment and distributed through the
selected outlet.
Use the OFF position for normal heater or
air conditioner operation.
Air conditioner button
Start the engine, turn the fan control
dial to the desired position and press
the
button to turn on the air condi-
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from
the defrost outlets and the side vent out-
lets.
1. Press the
button to the OFF posi-
tion for normal heating.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side
and center vents.
1. Press the
button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the de-
sired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the defrost/defog button
.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
windows, turn the
fan control dial
to the highest setting and the tempera-
ture control to the full HOT position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
∙ When the position is selected, the
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
The
mode automatically turns off,
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further im-
prove the defogging performance. The
recirculation mode cannot be activated
in the
position.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to
the side and center vents and to the front
and rear floor outlets.
1. Press the
button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windshield.
1. Press the
air flow control button.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
∙ When the
position is selected, the
air conditioner automatically turns on if
the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
The
mode automatically turns off,
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further im-
prove the defogging performance.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the fan control
dial to the desired position, and press
the
button to activate the air condi-
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cool-
ing and dehumidifying functions are
added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
the air.
1. Press the
button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Press the
button.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
∙ For quick cooling when the outside
temperature is high, press the
button to the ON position. Be sure to
return the
to the OFF position for
normal cooling. MAX A/C may be used
for quick cooling.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
the air.
1. Press the
button to the OFF posi-
tion.
2. Press the
air flow control button.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
3. Turn the fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Press the
button.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows
and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the
air flow control button.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
∙ When the
or are selected,
the air conditioner automatically turns
on if the outside temperature is more
than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
The
mode automatically turns off,
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further im-
prove the defogging performance.
∙ The air conditioner is always on in
mode, regardless of whether the indica-
tor light is on or off.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Operating tips
∙ Keep the windows and moonroof
closed while the air conditioner is in op-
eration.
∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or
3 minutes with the windows open to
vent hot air from the passenger com-
partment. Then, close the windows.
This allows the air conditioner to cool
the interior more quickly.
∙ The air conditioning system should
be operated for approximately
10 minutes at least once a month.
This helps prevent damage to the
system due to lack of lubrication.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
∙ If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. For additional
information, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, cooling or defrosting. The air re-
circulation button should always be in
the OFF position for heating and defrost-
ing.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
LHA4404 LHA4405
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4504 LHA4505
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
LHA4408
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. Temperature control buttons (driv-
er’s side)
2.
(front defroster) button
3.
rear window and outside mir-
ror defroster switch
4. Display screen
5. MODE (manual air flow control)
button
6.
Fresh air intake button
7.
Air recirculation button
8. Temperature control buttons (pas-
senger’s side)
9. DUAL button
10. A/C (air conditioner) button
11.
fan control buttons
12. AUTO (automatic) button
13. ON-OFF button
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the inte-
rior air to become stale and the win-
dows to fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls
to activate the air conditioner.
LHA2518
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-
hicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recir-
culation to allow fresh air into the pas-
senger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified
heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a
constant temperature. Air flow distribution
and fan speed are also controlled auto-
matically.
1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indica-
tor on the button will illuminate and
AUTO will be displayed.)
2. Use the temperature control buttons
to set the desired temperature.
∙ Adjust the temperature display to
about 75°F (24°C) for normal operation.
∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained auto-
matically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the vents in hot, humid conditions as
the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
3. You can individually set driver’s and
front passenger’s side temperature us-
ing each set of temperature control
buttons. When the DUAL button or pas-
senger’s side temperature control but-
tons are pressed, the DUAL indicator
will come on. To turn off the passen-
ger’s side temperature control, press
the DUAL button.
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When
you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the
button (A/C indicator
will turn off).
2. Use the temperature control buttons
to set the desired temperature.
∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained auto-
matically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature or the sys-
tem may not work properly.
∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.
Dehumidified defrosting or
defogging
1. Press the
front defroster button.
2. Use the temperature control buttons
to set the desired temperature.
∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside
of the windows, use the fan speed con-
trol dial to set the fan speed to maxi-
mum.
∙ As soon as possible after the wind-
shield is clean, press the AUTO button to
return to the automatic mode.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ When the front defroster button is
pressed, the air conditioner will auto-
matically be turned on at outside tem-
peratures above 36°F (2°C). The air recir-
culate mode automatically turns off,
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further im-
prove the defogging performance.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Press the fan control buttons to
manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to auto-
matic control of the fan speed.
Temperature control
Press the temperature control
buttons
, to set the desired
temperature.
Air recirculation
Press the air recirculation button to
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
Press the AUTO button to return to auto-
matic mode.
The air recirculation cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting mode.
Fresh air intake
Press the fresh air intake button to
draw outside air into the passenger com-
partment.
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be
controlled automatically. To manually con-
trol the intake air, press the
air recir-
culation button. To return to the automatic
control mode, press and hold the
air
recirculation button or press and hold
the
fresh air intake button for about
2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air re-
circulation and fresh air intake buttons) will
flash twice and then the intake air will be
controlled automatically.
Air conditioner button
Start the engine, press the
fan control
buttons to the desired position and press
the
button to turn on the air condi-
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
Air flow control
Pressing the MODE button manually con-
trols air flow and selects the air outlet:
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and
foot outlets.
To turn system off
Press the ON-OFF button.
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
OPERATING TIPS
The sunload sensor, located on the top
passenger’s side of the instrument panel,
helps the system maintain a constant
temperature. Do not put anything on or
around this sensor.
∙ When the engine coolant temperature
and outside air temperature are low, the
air flow from the foot outlets may not
operate for a maximum of 150 seconds.
However, this is not a malfunction. After
the coolant temperature warms up, air
flow from the foot outlets will operate
normally.
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-
signed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant
is required when servicing your NISSAN air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to
your air conditioner system. For additional
information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-
tem (if so equipped) refrigerant and oil rec-
ommendations” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to service your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper
equipment.
RADIO
With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON
position, press the
(power ON) or ON-
OFF button to turn the radio on. If you listen
to the radio with the engine not running,
the ignition should be placed in the ACC
position.
Radio reception is affected by station sig-
nal strength, distance from radio transmit-
ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other
external influences. Intermittent changes
in reception quality normally are caused by
these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
hicle may influence radio reception qual-
ity.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-
hance radio reception. These circuits are
designed to extend reception range, and to
enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general charac-
teristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception
LHA4596
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER (if so
equipped)
AUDIO SYSTEM
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-
ference from other vehicles can work
against ideal reception. Described below
are some of the factors that can affect your
radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –
30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range
than stereo FM. External influences may
sometimes interfere with FM station re-
ception even if the FM station is within 25
mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-
low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of
the same characteristics as light. For ex-
ample, they will reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away
from a station transmitter, the signals will
tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interfer-
ence from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position (usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the treble
control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-
tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and
reflected signals reach the receiver at the
same time. The signals may cancel each
other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss
of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency,
can bend around objects and skip along
the ground. In addition, the signals can be
bounced off the ionosphere and bent back
to earth. Because of these characteristics,
AM signals are also subject to interference
as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas
with many tall buildings. It can also occur
for several seconds during ionospheric tur-
bulence even in areas where no obstacles
exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic
lights.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first
time or the battery has been replaced, the
satellite radio may not work properly. This
is not a malfunction. Wait more than
10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the
vehicle outside of any metal or large build-
ing for satellite radio to receive all of the
necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and
“NO SAT” or “No Signal” is displayed when
the SAT band option is selected unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be af-
fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks
the satellite radio signal.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
If possible, do not put cargo over the satel-
lite antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio an-
tenna can affect satellite radio perfor-
mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite
radio reception.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
∙ Do not force a compact disc into the
CD insert slot. This could damage the
CD and/or CD player.
∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or
CD player.
∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
∙ Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
∙ During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
humidity. If this occurs, remove the
CD and dehumidify or ventilate the
player completely.
∙ The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
∙ The CD player sometimes cannot
function when the compartment
temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
LHA0099
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
∙ CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fin-
gerprints may not work properly.
∙ The following CDs may not work
properly:
∙ Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
∙ Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
∙ Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
∙ Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
∙ 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
∙ CDs that are not round
∙ CDs with a paper label
∙ CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
∙ This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
∙ If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
CHECK DISC
∙ Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
rectly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
∙ Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT
This is an error due to excessive tem-
perature inside the player. Remove
the CD by pressing the EJECT button.
After a short time, reinsert the CD.
The CD can be played when the tem-
perature of the player returns to nor-
mal.
UNPLAYABLE
The file is unplayable in this audio
system (only MP3 or WMA CD).
Compact disc with MP3 or WMA
Terms
∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital
audio file format. This format allows for
near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction
of the size of normal audio files. MP3
conversion of an audio track from CD-
ROM can reduce the file size by approxi-
mately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no per-
ceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant
and irrelevant parts of a sound signal
that the human ear doesn’t hear.
∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is
a compressed audio format created by
Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The
WMA codec offers greater file compres-
sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-
age of more digital audio tracks in the
same amount of space when com-
pared to MP3s at the same level of qual-
ity.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital mu-
sic file. The size and quality of a com-
pressed digital audio file is determined
by the bit rate used when encoding the
file.
∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-
quency is the rate at which the samples
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.
∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
that contains information about the
digital music file such as song title, art-
ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura-
tion, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed
on the Artist/song title line on the dis-
play.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-
istered trademarks and trademarks in the
United States of America and other coun-
tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
Playback order
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or
WMA files is as illustrated.
∙ The names of folders not containing
MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the
display.
∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
∙ The playback order is the order in which
the files were written by the writing soft-
ware. Therefore, the files might not play
in the desired order.
Playback order chart
WHA1078
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Specification chart
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported
versions*1
MP3
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling fre-
quency
8kHz-48kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling fre-
quency
32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
Displayable character codes*2
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNI-
CODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
Troubleshooting guide
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot play
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of char-
acters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long
time before the music
starts playing.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music
starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not
match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit
rate files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to
the next song when play-
ing
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright
protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back
in the desired order
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the de-
sired order.
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-
vice. USB devices should be purchased
separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB
memory devices. To format a USB device,
use a personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the
front seats plays only sound without im-
ages for regulatory reasons, even when the
vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB
memory devices, USB hard drives and
iPod® players. Some USB devices may not
be supported by this system.
∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play
correctly.
∙ Some characters used in other lan-
guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may
not appear properly in the display. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
General notes for USB use
∙ For additional information, refer to your
device manufacturer’s owner informa-
tion regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
Notes for iPod® use
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a check mark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
∙
An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod®.
∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on an iPod®.
∙ Large video files cause slow responses
in an iPod®. The vehicle center display
may momentarily black out, but will
soon recover.
∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large
video files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momen-
tarily black out, but will soon recover.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
Bluetooth® streaming audio
∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle au-
dio system.
∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible
Bluetooth® audio device and the in-
vehicle Bluetooth® module before using
the Bluetooth® audio.
∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®
audio will vary depending on the de-
vices. Make sure how to operate your
audio device before using it with this
system.
∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped
under the following conditions:
∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
∙ Checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.
∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de-
vice in an area surrounded by metal or
far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module to prevent tone quality degra-
dation and wireless connection disrup-
tion.
∙ While an audio device is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
nection, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon and
Bosch.
4-42
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.
1.
CD eject button
2. FM•AM button
3. CD insert slot
4. Display screen
5. SCAN button
6.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
7. iPod MENU button
8.
BACK button
9. ENTER/SETTING button and TUNE/
FOLDER control knob
10. Station select (1–6) buttons
11. RDM button
12. RPT button
13.
VOL (volume) knob /
(power) button
14. DISP button
15. MEDIA button
16. CD button
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) knob / (power)
button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the VOL (volume) knob
/
(power) button while the system is
off to call up the mode that was playing
immediately before the system was turned
off.
LHA3026
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
To turn the system off, press the VOL (vol-
ume) knob /
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) knob /
(power)
to adjust the volume.
ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show
the Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to navigate the op-
tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to make a selection.
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and
right speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear
speakers.
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as
the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the
more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting
of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Clock Allows the user to set time manually.
On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Language Select the desired language for the system from the available options.
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/FOLDER control knob
to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display
will automatically reappear.
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Clock Set
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select
CLOCK.
3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select
“set time”.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
6. Rotate the TUNE/FOLDER knob to ad-
just hours.
7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
8. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust
minutes.
9. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
10. Press the
BACK button to finish.
iPod MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod® op-
erations.For additional information, refer to
“iPod® player operation without Navigation
System” in this section.
DISP (display) button
Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is
playing to change the text shown in the
audio display as follows:
For CDs:
Running Time → Album Title: → Artist
Name: → Song Title
For MP3 CDs:
Running Time → Folder Title: → Album Title:
→ Artist Name: → Song Title:
If the text information is too long to fully be
displayed on the screen; press and hold the
DISP button for longer than 1.5 seconds to
scroll through the rest of the text.
Press the DISP (display) button while the
radio is playing to toggle the audio display
between station number and RDS.
MEDIA button
Press the MEDIA button to toggle between
different media options connected to the
system.
BACK button
Press the
BACK button to return to
the previous menu screen.
FM/AM radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin play-
ing.
TUNE/FOLDER knob tuning
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning
Press the SEEK•TRACK button
or to tune from low to high or high to
low frequencies and to stop at the next
broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN
will appear on the screen while the radio is
scan tuning.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Pressing the button again during this
5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pressed within
5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be
set for the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM or FM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press
and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep
sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Pro-
gramming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-
celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-
tions.
Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automati-
cally turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
radio turns off and the last used compact
disc starts to play.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain
text may be displayed on the screen if the
CD has been encoded with text informa-
tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD
is encoded, information such as Artist,
Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of
tracks in the current folder or on the cur-
rent disc are displayed on the screen as
well.
SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the SEEK/TRACK
button
or for 1.5 seconds while
the compact disc is playing to reverse or
fast forward the track being played. The
compact disc plays at an increased speed
while reversing or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/TRACK button
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
while a
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press
the SEEK/TRACK button
several
times to skip backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
while a
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/TRACK
button
several times to skip forward
several tracks. If the last track on a CD is
skipped, the first track on the disc is played.
If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA
CD is skipped, the first track of the next
folder is played.
TUNE/FOLDER knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to
skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right
to skip ahead a folder.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is dis-
played on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is dis-
played on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
CD EJECT
When the
CD eject button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will be ejected.
When the
CD eject button is pressed
while the compact disc is playing, the com-
pact disc will eject and the system will turn
off.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation without Navigation Sys-
tem” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port
(models without Navigation System)” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navi-
gation System” in this section.
Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of Labeling
Additional Obligation of Labeling
This product is protected by certain intel-
lectual property rights of Microsoft
Corporation and third parties. Use or distri-
bution of such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a license
from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
subsidiary and third parties.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
A) (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.
1.
CD eject button
2. RPT button
3. RDM button
4. Display screen
5. SCAN button
6.
SEEK/CAT buttons
7. iPod MENU button
8.
BACK button
9. ENTER/SETTING button and
TUNE/SCROLL control knob
10. Station select (1–6) buttons
11.
VOL (volume) knob / (power) button
12. DISP button
13. MEDIA button
14. XM button*
15. FM•AM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional sat-
ellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.
LHA4427
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Audio main operation
(power) button / VOL (volume)
control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the
(power) but-
ton while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,
USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-
just the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-
tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
ENTER/SETTING button
Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show
the Settings screen on the display. Turn the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the op-
tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button to make a selection.
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right
speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed
of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume in-
creases in relation to vehicle speed.
AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 pro-
vides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.
Brightness and Contrast Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.
Clock Allows the user to set time manually.
On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.
Language Select the desired language for the system from the available options.
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING
button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display
will automatically reappear.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Clock Set
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
CLOCK.
3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“set time”.
5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
6. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to ad-
just hours.
7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
8. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust
minutes.
9. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
10. Press the
BACK button to finish.
BACK button
Press the
BACK button to return to
the previous menu screen.
DISP (display) button
The DISP (display) button turns the display
screen on or off.
iPod MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod® op-
erations.For additional information, refer to
“iPod® player operation without Navigation
System” in this section.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin play-
ing.
XM band select
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the station last
played.
The last station played will also come on
when the
(power) button is pressed
on.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satel-
lite radio reception will not be available un-
less an optional satellite receiver and an-
tenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio service subscription is active. Satel-
lite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM
button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)
Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or
right for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning
Press the
SEEK button or
TRACK button to tune from low to high or
high to low frequencies and to stop at the
next broadcasting station.
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SCAN tuning
Press the SCAN button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN
will appear on the screen while the radio is
scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this
5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pressed within
5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can
be set for the satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for
XM2, 6 for XM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or
choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or
XM3 using the XM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press
and hold any of the desired station
memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset
number is updated on the display and
the sound is briefly muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Pro-
gramming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-
celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-
tions.
Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automati-
cally turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
MEDIA button
With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button
until the CD mode is displayed on the
screen.
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain
text may be displayed on the screen if the
CD has been encoded with text informa-
tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD
is encoded, information such as Artist,
Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of
tracks in the current folder or on the cur-
rent disc are displayed on the screen as
well.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) button
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button
or for 1.5 seconds while the compact
disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the
track being played. The compact disc plays
at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is re-
leased, the compact disc returns to normal
play speed.
SEEK/CAT button
Press the SEEK/CAT button
while a
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press
the SEEK/CAT button
several times
to skip backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT button
while a
CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip forward several
tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,
the first track on the disc is played. If the last
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)
If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is
playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to
skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right
to skip ahead a folder.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is dis-
played on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
CD:
1 Disc Random ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is dis-
played on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
EJECT button
When the
button is pressed with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will
eject and the last source will be played.
When the
button is pressed twice
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will be ejected further for easier CD
removal. If the disc is not removed within
20 seconds, the disc will reload.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation without Navigation Sys-
tem” in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port
(models without Navigation System)” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navi-
gation System” in this section.
Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of Labeling
Additional Obligation of Labeling
This product is protected by certain intel-
lectual property rights of Microsoft
Corporation and third parties. Use or distri-
bution of such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a license
from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
subsidiary and third parties.
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type
B) (if so equipped)
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” regarding all opera-
tion precautions in this section.
1.
CD eject button
2. FM-AM button
3. AUX button
4. CD insert slot
5.
Backward seek button and
Forward seek button
6. BACK button
7. AUDIO button/ TUNE knob
8. Display screen
9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
10. CD button
11. SXM button*
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the SXM button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional sat-
ellite receiver and antenna are installed
and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
LHA2895
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
Audio main operation
ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control
knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the ON-OFF button
while the system is off to call up the mode
(radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or
iPod®) that was playing immediately before
the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF
button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-
just the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-
tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
AUDIO button
Press the AUDIO button to show the Set-
tings screen on the display. Turn the TUNE
knob to navigate the options and then
press the AUDIO button to make a
selection.
Audio
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right
speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the
speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “ 0 ” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the vol-
ume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Avail-
able options are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).
Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust.
When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the TUNE knob to adjust and then press the AUDIO button to select. Press the BACK
button until the display returns to the main audio screen.
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
BACK button
Pressing the BACK button will return the
user to the previous menu.
SXM settings
To view the SXM settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “SXM” key.
The signal strength, activation status and
other information are displayed on the
screen.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button
Press the FM·AM button to change the
band as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source
playing will automatically be turned off and
the last radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
the radio automatically changes from ste-
reo to monaural reception.
SXM band select
Pressing the SXM button will change the
band as follows:
SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM3* → SXM1* (satellite,
if so equipped)
When the SXM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
the radio will come on at the last station
played.
The last station played will also come on
when the ON-OFF button is pressed to turn
the radio on.
*When the SXM button is pressed, the sat-
ellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio
is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the SXM
button is pressed, the compact disc will
automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
While the radio is in SXM mode, the opera-
tion can be controlled through the touch-
screen. Touch the “Categories” key to dis-
play a list of categories. Touch a category
displayed on the list to display options
within that category.
Tuning with the touch-screen
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be
tuned using the touch-screen. To bring up
the visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the
lower right corner of the screen. A screen
appears with a bar running from low fre-
quencies on the left to high frequencies on
the right. Touch the screen at the location
of the frequency you wish to tune and the
station will change to that frequency. To
return to the regular radio display screen,
touch the “OK” key.
Tuning with the TUNE knob
The radio can also be manually tuned us-
ing the TUNE knob.When in FM or AM mode,
turn the TUNE knob to the left for lower
frequencies or to the right for higher fre-
quencies. When in SXM mode, turn the
TUNE knob to change the channel.
SEEK tuning
When in FM or AM mode, press the seek
buttons
or to tune from low to
high or high to low frequencies and to stop
at the next broadcasting station.
When in SXM mode, press the seek
buttons
or to change the cat-
egory.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and 6 stations can be
set for the AM band. Eighteen stations can
be set for the SXM band (6 for SXM1, 6 for
SXM2, 6 for SXM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM button or choose the
radio band SXM1, SXM2, SXM3 using the
SXM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
manual or seek tuning. Press and hold
any of the desired station memory (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Pro-
gramming is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the
fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-
celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-
tions.
Presets can also be selected by touching
the desired preset number on the screen.
Smart Favorites Preset Setup (if
so equipped)
The Smart Favorites feature allows the
user to designate presets, within the SXM1,
SXM2 and SXM3 bands, as their Smart Fa-
vorites. When any of the Smart Favorite
presets are selected, the current track on
that station will play from the beginning of
the song.
LHA2899 LHA3085
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
To program a Smart Favorite preset:
1. Press the SXM button.
2. Touch the “Setup” key.
3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate
(ON) or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favor-
ites.
4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an
available preset.
For additional information regarding pre-
set memory options, refer to “1 to 6 station
memory operations” in this section.
NOTE:
• Smart Favorites will start functioning
only after the audio unit is turned on for
a few minutes.
• Tune Start is supported for music chan-
nels only.
Replay Screen
The Replay Screen gives the user the ability
to replay, skip, pause or rewind the cur-
rently aired track.
When the “Replay” key is touched, the Re-
play Screen is prompted.
REPLAY To replay a track from
the beginning, press
the
seek key. The
user can continue to
press the
seek key
to replay previous songs,
but can only go back as
far as the system
permits. The system will
warn the user when they
cannot skip any further
back by displaying “At
the End” in the bottom
left corner of the screen.
SKIP To skip a track, press
the
seek key. “Live”
will appear in the bottom
left corner of the screen
indicating the difference
from play time to live
audio.
LHA3087
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
PAUSE To pause a track, press
the
pause key.
REWIND/
FAST
FORWARD
To rewind/ fast forward a
track, hold the
or seek key.
Compact disc (CD) player
operation
If the radio is already operating, it automati-
cally turns off and the compact disc begins
to play.
CD button
When the CD button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded,
the system will turn on and the compact
disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded and the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and
the compact disc will start to play.
CD/MP3 display mode
Menu item
CD/MP3
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded
with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is dis-
played listing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when
aCDisplaying.
Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-
ing “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the
display. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key until the key is no longer highlighted.
Repeat Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching
“Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text
will appear on the display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer
highlighted
Browse Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the
list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the
folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a
folder.
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SEEK (Reverse or Fast
Forward) buttons
Press and hold the SEEK buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while the compact
disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the
track being played. The compact disc plays
at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is re-
leased, the compact disc returns to normal
play speed.
SEEK buttons
Press the SEEK button
while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press the
SEEK button
several times to skip
backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK button
while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one
track. Press the SEEK button
several
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track on a CD is skipped, the first track
on the disc is played. If the last track in a
folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.
AUX button
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from
a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3
player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX
button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN jack.
CD EJECT button
When the
CD EJECT button is pressed
with a compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will eject and the last source will be
played.
If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds,
the disc will reload.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation with Navigation System”
in this section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models with Navigation System)” in this
section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio with Naviga-
tion System” in this section.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models
without Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
LHA4294
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB port is located in the center con-
sole. Insert the USB device into the connec-
tion port
䊊
1
.
When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compat-
ible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.
Audio file operation
MEDIA button (if so equipped)
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the MEDIA button to
switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is
playing or another audio source is plugged
in through the AUX IN jack located in the
center console, the MEDIA button toggles
between the three sources.
Play information
Information about the audio files being
played can be displayed on the display
screen of the vehicle’s audio system. De-
pending on how the audio files are en-
coded, information such as Folder, Song
and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total
tracks in the folder are displayed on the
screen as well.
SEEK/CAT or TRACK
(Reverse or Fast
Forward) buttons
Press and hold the
or
SEEK/CAT or TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The track plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the
audio file returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT or TRACK
buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to return to the beginning of the
current track. Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
button
several times to skip back-
ward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
while an audio file on the USB device is
playing to advance one track. Press the
SEEK/CAT or TRACK button
several
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
RDM (random) button
When the RDM button is pressed while an
audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF
All Random: all tracks on the USB device will
be played randomly.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pat-
tern is applied.
RPT (repeat) button
When the RPT button is pressed while an
audio file on the USB device is playing, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be
repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device
is displayed on the screen unless no pat-
tern is applied.
TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob
If there are multiple folders with audio files
on the USB device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER
or TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders.
Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of
audio files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob in ei-
ther direction will return to the first track on
the USB device.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT (models with
Navigation System) (if so
equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB
connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
LHA4294
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB port is located in the center con-
sole. Insert the USB device into the connec-
tion port
䊊
1
.
When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compat-
ible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.
Audio file operation
AUX (auxiliary) button
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to
switch to the USB input mode. If another
audio source is playing and a USB memory
device is inserted, press the AUX button
until the center display changes to the USB
memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the
USB memory was playing, press the ON-
OFF button to restart the USB memory.
Play information
Information about the audio files being
played is shown on the display screen of
the vehicle’s audio system. Touch “Browse”
to display the list of categories that can be
used to narrow the search. Touch the
name of a song on the screen to begin
playing that song.
LHA4006
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SEEK buttons
Press the
button while an audio file
on the USB device is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
the
button several times to skip
backward several tracks.
Press the
button while an audio file
on the USB device is playing to advance
one track. Press the
button several
times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is
played.
Random and repeat play mode
While files on a USB device are playing, the
play pattern can be altered so that songs
are repeated or played randomly.
Random
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random
play pattern to the USB device. When the
Random mode is active, the text “Random”
on the key will illuminate and the text “Ran-
dom Folder” appears. By touching the “Ran-
dom” key once more, the text “Random All”
appears. To cancel Random mode, touch
the “Random” key until no text is illumi-
nated.
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
play pattern to the USB device. When the
Repeat mode is active, the text on the “Re-
peat” key will illuminate and the text “Re-
peat Track” appears. By touching the “Re-
peat” key once more, the text “Repeat
Folder” appears. To cancel Repeat mode,
touch the “Repeat” key until no text is illumi-
nated.
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
LHA4294
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB connection port located in the
center console
䊊
1
. Connect the iPod®-
specific end of the cable to the iPod® and
the USB end of the cable to the USB con-
nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®
supports charging via a USB connection, its
battery will be charged while connected to
the vehicle with the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
may only be able to be operated by the
vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB connection port on the vehicle, then
remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version
1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version
1.1.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version
2.0.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.0.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB)
(firmware version 1.0.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.2PC or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-
ware version 1.1PC or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware
version 2.2.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware
version 3.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware
version 4.3.5 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or
later)
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)
∙ iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-
dated to the version indicated above.
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, press the MEDIA button or
iPod MENU button repeatedly to switch to
the iPod® mode.
If the audio system is turned off while the
iPod® is playing, the iPod® plays when the
audio system is turned back on.
If the audio system is off, pressing the ME-
DIA button or iPod MENU button turns the
audio system on and plays the iPod®.
If the audio system is on, the audio system
automatically begins playing tracks from
the iPod® when it is plugged into the port.
iPod MENU button
Press the iPod MENU button while the
iPod® is connected to show the iPod® op-
eration menu on the audio display. Scroll
through the menu list using the
TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Press ENTER/SETTING button to select a
menu item. Items in the iPod® menu ap-
pear on the display in the following order:
∙ Now playing
∙ Playlists
∙ Artists
∙ Albums
∙ Songs
∙ Podcasts
∙ Genres
∙ Composers
∙ Audiobooks
∙ Shuffle songs
For additional information, refer to the
iPod® Owner’s Manual regarding each
item.
SEEK/CAT or TRACK
buttons
Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
buttons
or to skip backward or
forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT or TRACK
buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while
a track is playing to reverse or fast forward
the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast
forwarding. When the button is released,
the track returns to normal play speed.
REPEAT (RPT)
When the RPT button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat →
Repeat Off
1 Track Repeat: the current track will be
repeated.
All Repeat: all songs in the current list are
repeated.
Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is ap-
plied.
RANDOM (RDM)
When the RDM button is pressed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle
→ Shuffle Off
Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list
will be played randomly.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list
will be played randomly.
Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is ap-
plied.
BACK button
When the
BACK button is pressed, it
returns to the previous menu.
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB connection port located in the
center console
䊊
1
. Connect the iPod®-
specific end of the cable to the iPod® and
the USB end of the cable to the USB con-
nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®
supports charging via a USB connection, its
LHA4294
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
battery will be charged while connected to
the vehicle with the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
may only be able to be operated by the
vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB connection port on the vehicle, then
remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware
version 2.0.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware
version 4.2.1 or later)*
∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware
version 1.0.2 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware
version 1.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be
fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-
dated to the version indicated above.
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the AUX button repeatedly
to switch to the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the
iPod® was playing, pressing the ON·OFF
button will start the iPod®.
AUX button
When the AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the iPod® connected, the
system will turn on. If another audio source
is playing and the iPod® is connected, press
the AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the iPod® mode.
LHA4007
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
Interface
The interface for iPod® operation shown on
the vehicle’s audio system display screen is
similar to the iPod® interface. Use the
touch-screen, BACK button or the TUNE
knob to navigate the menus on the screen.
When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu”
key to bring up the iPod® interface.
Depending on the iPod® model, the follow-
ing items may be available on the menu list
screen. For additional information, refer to
the iPod® Owner’s Manual.
∙ Playlists
∙ Artists
∙ Albums
∙ Songs
∙ Genres
∙ Composers
∙ Audiobooks
∙ Podcasts
∙ Update Music Library
Shuffle and repeat play mode
While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern
can be altered so that songs are repeated
or played randomly.
Shuffle
Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random
play pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle
mode is active, the text is illuminated and
will display “Shuffle songs” text above the
“Shuffle” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch
the “Shuffle” key again until the text is no
longer illuminated.
Repeat
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat
play pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat
mode is active, the text is illuminated and
will display “Repeat song” text above the
“Repeat” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch
the “Repeat” key again until the text is no
longer illuminated.
SEEK buttons
Press the SEEK button
or to
skip backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK button
or for 1.5 seconds while a track is
playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The track plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the
track returns to normal play speed.
LHA4592
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Scrolling menus
While navigating long lists of artists, al-
bums or songs in the music menu, it is
possible to scroll the list by the first charac-
ter in the name. To activate character in-
dexing, touch the “A-Z” key in the upper
right corner of the screen. Turn the TUNE
knob to choose the number or letter to
jump to in the list and then press the AUDIO
button.
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehi-
cle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers. For additional information, refer
to “FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player” or “FM/AM/SAT radio with compact
disc (CD) player (Type A)” in this section.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to the
Cellular Phone Owner’s Manual.
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
the “Bluetooth” option.
3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Add Phone or Device”. This same
screen can be accessed to remove, re-
place or select a different Bluetooth®
device.
LHA2279 LHA2775
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
4. The system acknowledges the com-
mand and asks you to initiate connect-
ing from the phone handset. The con-
necting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional informa-
tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
Press the MEDIA button repeatedly to
toggle through the following menu op-
tions;
∙ Title
∙ Artist
∙ Album
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehi-
cle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers.
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device
to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
LHA3747
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
5. The system acknowledges the com-
mand and asks you to initiate connect-
ing from the phone handset. The con-
necting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. For additional informa-
tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recom-
mended cellular phones.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,
press the AUX button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are
displayed on the screen.
CD CARE AND CLEANING
∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend
the disc. Never touch the surface of the
disc.
∙ Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
∙ Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-
trial use.
LHA2844 LHA0049
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
edges with the side of a pen or pencil as
illustrated.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
1. Tuning switch/ENTER button (if so
equipped)
2. SOURCE switch
3. Volume control switch
The audio system can be operated using
the controls on the steering wheel.
Type A (if so equipped)
LHA2498
Type B (if so equipped)
LHA4000
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SOURCE switch
Press the SOURCE switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → (XM1 → XM2 → XM3
(satellite radio, if so
equipped))→(SXM1→SXM2→SXM3 (satellite,
if so equipped))→ CD* → USB/iPod®* →
Bluetooth® Audio* (if so equipped) → AUX*
→ AM.
* These modes are only available when
compatible media storage is inserted into
the device or connected to the system.
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase
or decrease the volume.
Tuning switch
While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Tuning switch upward or
downward to select a station, track, CD or
folder. For most audio sources, tilting the
switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
provides a different function than a tilting
up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.
AM and FM
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to seek up or down to the next station.
XM/SXM (if so equipped)
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to go to the next or previous category.
iPod®
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to fast forward or rewind the current
track.
CD
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the folder num-
ber (if playing compressed audio files)
or to fast forward or rewind the current
track.
USB
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
to fast forward or rewind the current
track.
Bluetooth® Audio (if so equipped)
∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
skip ahead or back to the next song.
ANTENNA
The antenna pattern is printed inside the
rear window.
CAUTION
∙ Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor recep-
tion or noise.
∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone
Integration technology. This allows many
compatible Smartphone applications to
be displayed and easily controlled through
the vehicle’s touch-screen.
NOTE:
A compatible smartphone and registra-
tion is required to use mobile applica-
tions or to access connected features of
certain vehicle applications.
REGISTERING WITH
NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS
To use the Smartphone Integration feature,
it is necessary for the user to register. In
order to register, visit the NissanConnect®
Mobile Apps website,
www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or
www.nissan.ca/en/connect or
www.nissan.ca/fr/connect and sign up or
create an account through the prompts on
the NissanConnect Mobile Apps. Once reg-
istered, download the NissanConnect Mo-
bile Apps from your compatible phone’s
application download source and then log
into the application. If you already have an
account created through the App, please
log in.
CONNECT PHONE
To use this feature, a compatible smart-
phone must be connected via Bluetooth®
or USB to the vehicle. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System with Navigation System” in
this section.
NOTE:
For vehicles with a navigation system,
Apple iPhones® REQUIRE the phone to be
plugged in via USB for NissanConnect
Mobile Apps to function.
NOTE:
For Android phones, NissanConnect Mo-
bile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be
paired via Bluetooth®.
APPLICATION DOWNLOAD
Once connected, the NissanConnect App
will search your phone to determine which
compatible applications are currently in-
stalled. The user will then choose which
apps they want to bring into their vehicle
from the list of apps within the “Manage My
Apps” section of the NissanConnect App on
their smartphone. The vehicle will then
download the in-vehicle interface for each
of these compatible applications. Once
downloaded, the user can access their se-
lected smartphone applications through
the vehicle touch-screen. For additional in-
formation, refer to
www.nissanusa.com/connect or
www.nissan.ca/en/connect or
www.nissan.ca/fr/connect regarding ap-
plication availability.
NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS (if
so equipped)
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NissanConnect® Services is a suite of tele-
matics tools that provide emergency pre-
paredness, remote access, customizable
alerts and convenience services. This fea-
ture is an option on navigation system
equipped vehicles. For additional informa-
tion, refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual.
Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant
can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free
mode to reduce user distraction. In this
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac-
tion by voice control. After connecting a
compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated
from the
/ TALK switch on the
steering wheel.
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
displaying pictures or opening apps,
may not be available while driving.
∙ For best results, always update your de-
vice to the latest software version.
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to elimi-
nate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recogniz-
ing the voice commands correctly.
∙ For functions that can be used in Siri
Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple
website.
REQUIREMENTS
Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or
later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S
are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free sys-
tem. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for de-
tails about device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
accessible from the lock screen. Please
check phone settings.
For best results, always update your device
to the latest software version.
NISSANCONNECT® SERVICES (if so
equipped)
SIRI® EYES FREE
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
SIRI® ACTIVATION
Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by
pushing
/ TALK switch on the
steering wheel.
Models with navigation system
1. Connect an Siri Eyes Free enabled
iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Connecting pro-
cedure” in this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-
tablished, push and hold the
TALK
switch to activate the Siri Eyes Free
function.
Models without navigation system
1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled
iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to “Initialization” in
this section.
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-
tablished, the switch operation select
screen is displayed.
3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for
Siri Eyes Free activation Switch action
can also be changed from the
Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Changing
Siri Eyes Free Settings (models without
navigation system)” in this section.
OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Push or push and hold the /
TALK switch.
2. Speak your command and then listen
to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push
the
/ TALK switch again within
5 seconds of the end of the Siri Eyes Free
announcement to extend the session.
Example 1 – Playing music
1. Push or push and hold the
/
TALK switch.
2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,
etc.)”.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change
to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*
when the music starts playing. Mode
selection is determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the
USB cable.
If the audio track does not start playing
automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to re-
sume playback.
Type A (if so equipped)
LHA2522
Type B (if so equipped)
LHA3918
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
For best results, use the native music
app. Performance of music control func-
tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or
other 3rd party music apps may vary and
is controlled by the iPhone®.
Example2–Replying to text messages
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected
and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®
settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-
play a notification for new incoming
text messages.
2. After reading the message, push
the
switch to go back to the pre-
vious screen then push or push and
hold the
/ TALK switch to re-
ply using Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say “Text mes-
sage” or a similar command to reply
using Siri Eyes Free.
CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS (models without
navigation system)
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in
the Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-
tings” in this section.
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.
3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select
“Siri” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.
4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” us-
ing the TUNE/SCROLL knob and then
press the ENTER/SETTING button.
CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE
SETTINGS (models with
navigation system)
Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in
the Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-
tings” in this section.
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone settings” key.
5. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” to
set the activation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot access Siri Eyes
Freefromswitchonthe
steering wheel
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
Models without navigation system:
Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must push and hold
the
/ TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”, a
short push and release of the switch should start Siri Eyes Free.
Audio Source does not
change automatically to
iPod® or Bluetooth® Au-
dio mode
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade
performance.
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
Play, pause, next track,
previous track or play
timer does not work
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
Cannot hear any music/
audio being played back
from a connected
iPhone®
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
Cannot hear map turn-
by-turn direction guid-
ance from a connected
iPhone®
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
Cannot receive text mes-
sage notifications on the
vehicle audio system
Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.
Press the info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
Cannot reply to text
message notifications by
Siri Eyes Free
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the
/ TALK switch on the
steering wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the
new equipment may adversely affect the
engine control system and other electronic
parts.
WARNING
∙ A cellular phone should not be used
for any purpose while driving so full
attention may be given to vehicle op-
eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the use of cellular phones while
driving.
∙ If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended.
Exercise extreme caution at all times
so full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route
the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-
hicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise ex-
treme caution at all times so full at-
tention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
tery, use a phone after starting the
engine.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to
the in-vehicle phone module, no other
phone connecting procedure is required.
Your phone is automatically connected
with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition with the previously connected cellu-
lar phone turned on and carried in the ve-
hicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® de-
vices; however some phones do not con-
nect automatically to the system. For
additional information, refer to the
phone’s Owner’s Manual.
You can connect up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-
vehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection be-
tween a compatible cellular phone and
the in-vehicle phone module before us-
ing the hands-free phone system.
LHA3914
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized or work
properly. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting in-
structions.
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an under-
ground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-
vent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other per-
son’s voice during a call.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
∙
While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-
tion, the battery power of the cellular
phone may discharge quicker than usual.
The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem cannot charge cellular phones.
∙ For additional information, please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a differ-
ent location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-
ing the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-
tenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-
lations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands
may not be available so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-
ized, which takes a few seconds. If the
(Type A) or the (Type B) button is
pressed before the initialization completes,
the system will announce “Hands-free
phone system not ready” and will not react
to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe
the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to elimi-
nate surrounding noises (traffic noises,
vibration sounds, etc.), which may pre-
vent the system from recognizing voice
commands correctly.
∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-
ing between words.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
press and release the
(Type A) or
the
(Type B) button located on the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds,
speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
∙ If you need to hear the available com-
mands for the current menu again, say
“Help” and the system will repeat them.
∙ If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Command not
recognized. Please try again.” Make sure
the command is said exactly as
prompted by the system and repeat
the command in a clear voice.
∙ If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is
waiting for a response.
∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by say-
ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-
nounces “Cancel” and ends the Voice
Recognition session. You can also press
and hold the
button on the steer-
ing wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the Voice Recognition session.
Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-
sion is cancelled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, press the volume con-
trol switches (+ or -) on the steering
wheel while being provided with feed-
back. You can also use the radio volume
control knob.
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button on the steering wheel. After
interrupting the system, wait for a beep
before speaking your command.
One Shot Call
To use the system faster, you may speak
the second level commands with the main
menu command on the main menu. For
example, press the
(Type A) or
the
(Type B) button and after the tone
say, “Call Redial”.
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.
or
PHONE/SEND
Press the
(Type A) or
the
(Type B) button to
initiate a Voice Recognition
session or answer an in-
coming call.
You can also use
the
(Type A) or
the
(Type B) button to
interrupt the system feed-
back and give a command
at once. For additional
information, refer to “Voice
commands” and “During a
call” in this section.
Type A (if so equipped)
LHA2499
Type B (if so equipped)
LHA3916
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
PHONE/END
While the Voice Recognition
system is active, press and
hold the
button for
5 seconds to quit the Voice
Recognition system at any
time.
Tuning switch
While using the Voice Recog-
nition system, tilt the tuning
switch up or down to manu-
ally control the phone
system.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
Manual Connecting Procedure
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL or
TUNE/FOLDER knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button.
Menu Item Result
Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.
On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on.
Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off.
Add Phone or Device Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and
complete the connection process.
Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded
using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.
LHA2775
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Automatic Connecting Procedure
If no phone is connected to the system,
press the
(Type A) or the (Type B)
button on the steering wheel. The system
will automatically begin searching for a
compatible phone. If the system detects a
compatible phone a message with a PIN
appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and
complete the connection process.
VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Press the
(Type A) or the (Type
B) button and say “Phone” to bring up the
phone command menu. The available op-
tions are:
∙ Call
∙ Phonebook
∙ Recent Calls
∙ Messaging (if so equipped)
∙ Select Phone
“Call”
For additional information, refer to “Making
a call” in this section.
“Phonebook”
The following commands are available un-
der “Phonebook”:
∙ (a name)
Say a name in the phonebook to bring
up a list of options for that phonebook
entry. The system will say the name it
interpreted based on the voice com-
mand provided. If the name is incorrect,
say “Correction” to hear another name.
Once the correct phonebook entry is
identified, say “Dial” to dial the number
or “Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Record Name” to re-
cord a name for the phonebook entry.
Say “Delete Recording” to delete a re-
corded name for the phonebook entry.
∙ List Names
Speak this command to have the sys-
tem list the names in the phonebook
one by one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to
dial the number of the current name or
“Send Text” to send a text message to
that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previ-
ous Entry” to move through the list al-
phabetically. Say “Record Name” to re-
cord a name for the current phonebook
entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a
recorded name for the current phone-
book entry.
“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available un-
der “Recent Calls”:
∙ Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the incoming call will
be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of in-
coming calls.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
∙ Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the missed call will be
displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of
missed calls.
∙ Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last five
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the
call was to an entry in the phonebook,
the name will be displayed. Otherwise,
the phone number of the outgoing call
will be displayed.
Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send
Text” to send a text message to that
number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous
Entry” to move through the list of out-
going calls.
∙ Redial
Speak this command to call the last
number dialed.
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the num-
ber of the last incoming call to the ve-
hicle.
“Messaging” (if so equipped)
Speak this command to access text mes-
saging functions. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec-
tion.
“Select Phone”
Speak this command to select a phone to
use from a list of those phones connected
to the vehicle.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call from a phone connected to
the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System:
NOTE:
Available commands different if system
is in Manual Control mode. For additional
information, refer to “Manual Control” in
this section.
1. Press the
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button.
2. The system will prompt you for a com-
mand. Say “Call”.
3. Select one of the available voice com-
mands to continue:
∙ “(a name)” — Speak the name of a
phonebook entry to place a call to that
entry. The system will respond with the
name it interpreted from your com-
mand and will prompt you to confirm
that the name is correct. Say “Yes” to
initiate the call or “No” to hear another
name from the phonebook.
∙ “List Names” – Speak this command to
have the system list the names in the
phonebook one by one alphabetically.
Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to
move through the list alphabetically.
Say “Select” once desired contact is
heard and displayed on screen. Say
“Dial” to dial the number of the current
name or say “Record Name” to record a
name for the current phonebook entry
to be assigned.
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙
“Phone Number” — Speak this command
to place a call by inputting numbers. For
7– to 10–digit phone number, speak the
numbers. Say “Correction” at any time in
the process to correct a misspoken or
misinterpreted number. For phone num-
bers with more digits or special charac-
ters, say “Special Number”, then speak the
digits. Up to 24 digits can be entered.
Available special characters are “start”,
“pound”, “plus”, and “pause”. When finished,
say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correc-
tion” at any time in the process to correct
a misspoken or misinterpreted number
or character.
∙ “Redial” – Speak this command to dial
the number of the last outgoing call.
The system will display “Re-dialing
<name/number>”. The name of the
phonebook entry will be displayed if it
available, otherwise the number being
re-dialed will be displayed.
∙ “Call Back” – Speak this command to
dial the number of the last incoming
call. The system will display “Calling
back <name/number>”. The name of
the phonebook entry will be displayed if
it available, otherwise the number be-
ing called back will be displayed.
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone con-
nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System, the call information is
displayed on either the vehicle information
display or both the vehicle information dis-
play and he control panel display.
Press the
(Type A) or the (Type
B) button to accept the call. Press the
button to reject the call.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active, press the (Type A)
or the
(Type B) button to access addi-
tional options. Speak one of the following
commands:
∙ “(numbers)” – Speak numbers and then
say “Send” or say “Correction” to change
the numbers entered.
∙
“Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the com-
mand to mute or unmute the system.
∙ “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to
transfer the call to the handset. To
transfer the call back from the handset
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, press the
(Type A) or
the
(Type B) button and confirm
when prompted.
If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System allows for call
waiting functionality. If a call is received
while another call is already active, a mes-
sage will be displayed on the screen. Press
the
(Type A) or the (Type B) but-
ton to hold the active call and switch to the
second call. Press the
button to reject
the second call.
While the second call is active, pressing
the
(Type A) or the (Type B) but-
ton will allow the same commands that are
available during any call and additional
commands:
∙ “Switch Call” – Speak this command to
hold the second call and switch back to
the original call.
∙ “End Other Call” – Speak this command
to stay with the second call and end the
original call.
Press the
(Type A) or the (Type
B) button to accept the call. Press the
button to reject the call.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the button.
TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.
Check local regulations before using
this feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of some of the applica-
tions and features, such as social net-
working and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-
tion. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme cau-
tion at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.
NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if
the connected device does not support
the Message Access Profile (MAP). For
additional information, refer to the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and
instructions.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special per-
mission to enable text messaging. Check
the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®
pairing. For some phones, you may need
to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
appear on the headunit. For additional
information, refer to your phone’s Own-
er’s manual. Text message integration
requires that the phone support MAP
(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-
ing and sending text messages. Some
phones may not support all text mes-
saging features. For additional informa-
tion, please refer to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-
ibility information, as well as your de-
vice’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and re-
ceiving of text messages through the ve-
hicle interface.
Sending a text message:
1. Press the
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
4. The system will provide a list of avail-
able commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:
∙ To (a name)
∙ Enter Number
∙ Missed Calls
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
For additional information about these
options, refer to “Voice commands” in
this section.
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Nine predefined messages are avail-
able as well as three custom mes-
sages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following
after the tone:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”
∙ “Call me”
∙ “On my way”
∙ “Running late”
∙ “Okay”
∙ “Yes”
∙ “No”
∙ “Where are you?”
∙ “When?”
∙ “Custom Messages”
To send one of the custom messages,
say “Custom Messages”. If more than
one custom message is stored, the sys-
tem will prompt for the number of the
desired custom message. For additional
information on setting and managing
custom text messages, refer to
“Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
(Type A) or
the
(Type B)button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The text message, sender and delivery
time are shown on the screen. Use the tun-
ing switch to scroll through all text mes-
sages if more than one are available. Press
the
button to exit the text message
screen. Press the
(Type A) or
the
(Type B) button to access the fol-
lowing options for replying to the text mes-
sage:
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender
of the text message using the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
∙ Send Text
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
∙ Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
∙ Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙ Next Text
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).
Siri® Eyes Free
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
it can also be used to create custom mes-
sages that are sent through the phone. For
additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
Free” in this section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access and adjust the settings for the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.
2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL or
TUNE/FOLDER knob to select
“Bluetooth” and then press the
ENTER/SETTING button:
∙ Bluetooth
Select “On” or “Off ” to turn the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® system on or off.
∙ Add Phone or Device
For additional information, refer to
“Connecting procedure” in this section.
∙ Delete Phone or Device
Select to delete a phone from the dis-
played list. The system will ask to con-
firm before deleting the phone.
∙ Replace Phone
Select to replace a phone from the dis-
played list. When a selection is made,
the system will ask to confirm before
proceeding. The recorded phonebook
for the phone being deleted will be
saved as long as the new phone’s
phonebook is the same as the old
phone’s phonebook.
∙ Select Phone or Device
Select to connect to a previously con-
nected phone from the displayed list.
∙ Phonebook Download
Select to turn on or off the automatic
download of a connected phone’s
phonebook.
∙ Show Incoming Calls
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming
call information displayed only in the
vehicle information display. Select
“Both” to have incoming call information
displayed in both the vehicle informa-
tion display and the center display
screen.
∙ Siri
Select the
(Type A) or the
(Type B) button operation for Siri ® Eyes
Free function from “Short Press” and
“Long Press” (if available). For additional
information, refer to “Siri ® Eyes Free” in
this section. “Siri” is displayed only when
a Siri Eyes Free enabled iPhone® is con-
nected to the vehicle.
∙ Text Message
Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text
messaging feature.
∙ New Text Sound
Select to adjust the volume of the
sound that plays when a new text is
received by a phone connected to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
The setting all the way to the left indi-
cates that the new text sound will be
muted.
LHA2274
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Show Incoming Text
Select “Driver Only” to have incoming
text messages displayed only in the ve-
hicle information display. Select “Both”
to have incoming text messages dis-
played in both the vehicle information
display and the center display screen.
Select “None” to have no display of in-
coming text messages.
∙ Edit Custom Messages
Select to set a custom message that
will be available with the standard op-
tions when sending a text message. To
set a custom message, send a text
message to your own phone number
while the phone is connected to the
system. Three custom messages can
be set. Custom messages can only be
set while the vehicle is stationary.
∙ Auto Reply
Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply
function. When enabled, the vehicle will
automatically send a predefined text
message to the sender when a text
message is received while driving.
∙ Auto Reply Message
Select to choose the message that is
sent when the Auto Reply function is
enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or
one of the three custom messages
stored in the system.
∙ Vehicle Signature On/Off
Select to choose whether or not the
vehicle signature is added to outgoing
text messages from the vehicle. This
message cannot be changed or cus-
tomized.
MANUAL CONTROL
While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition
system, it is possible to select menu op-
tions by using the steering wheel controls
instead of speaking voice commands. The
manual control mode does not allow dial-
ing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook
or Recent Calls lists. To re-activate NISSAN
Voice Recognition, exit the manual control
mode by pressing and holding
the
button. At that time, pressing
the
(Type A) or the (Type B) but-
ton will start the Hands Free Phone System.
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-
hicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise ex-
treme caution at all times so full at-
tention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
tery, use a phone after starting the
engine.
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to
the in-vehicle phone module, no other
phone connecting procedure is required.
Your phone is automatically connected
with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition with the connected cellular phone
turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to five different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-
vehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-
ports the phone commands, so dialing a
phone number using your voice is possible.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition System” in this section.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection be-
tween a cellular phone and the in-
vehicle phone module before using the
hands-free phone system.
∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by the
in-vehicle phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting.
LHA4573
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an under-
ground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-
vent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other per-
son’s voice during a call.
∙ Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be im-
possible to receive a call for a short pe-
riod of time.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
nection, the battery power of the cellu-
lar phone may discharge quicker than
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System cannot charge cellular
phones.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section. If
the hands-free phone system seems to
be malfunctioning. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a differ-
ent location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone owner’s manual regard-
ing the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
∙ The signal strength display on the
monitor will not coincide with the signal
strength display of some cellular
phones.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-
tenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-
lations.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Bosch.
VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate
various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem features using the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
While using the voice recognition system,
the system voice can be interrupted to al-
low the user to speak commands. While
the system is speaking, press the
button on the steering wheel. The system
voice will stop and a tone will be heard.
After the tone, speak desired command
(displayed on the touch-screen).
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
1. Press the [
] button on the control
panel.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.
5.
Initiate the connecting process from the
handset. The system will display the
message: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on
your Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is dis-
played on your Bluetooth® device, select
“Pair” to complete the pairing process.
For additional information, refer to the
Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
To access the vehicle phonebook:
1. Press the
button on the control
panel.
2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.
3. Choose the desired entry from the dis-
played list.
4. The number of the entry will be dis-
played on the screen. Touch the num-
ber to initiate dialing.
NOTE:
To scroll quickly through the list, touch the
“A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the
screen. Turn the TUNE knob to choose a
letter or number and then press AUDIO.
The list will move to the first entry that
begins with that number or letter.
LHA3748
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the
button on the control
panel. The “Phone” screen will appear
on the display.
2. Select one of the following options to
make a call:
∙ “Phonebook”: Select the name from an
entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.
∙ “Call Lists”: Select the name from the
incoming, outgoing or missed.
∙ “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from
the vehicle.
∙“
”: Input the phone number manu-
ally using a keypad displayed on the
screen. For additional information, refer
to “How to use the touch-screen” in this
section.
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is placed to the connected
phone, the display will change to phone
mode.
To accept the incoming call, either:
∙ Press the
button on the steering
wheel, or
∙ Touch the phone icon on the screen.
To reject the incoming call, either:
∙ Press the
button on the steering
wheel, or
∙ Touch the phone icon on the screen.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active, the following options
are available on the screen:
∙ “Handset”
Select this option to switch control of
the phone call over to the handset.
∙ “Mute Mic.”
Select this option to mute the micro-
phone. Select again to unmute the mi-
crophone.
∙ Phone
icon
Select to end the phone call.
ENDING A CALL
To end a phone call, select the phone
icon on the screen or press the but-
ton on the steering wheel.
TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.
Check local regulations before using
this feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of some of the applica-
tions and features, such as social net-
working and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-
tion. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme cau-
tion at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if
the connected device does not support
the Message Access Profile (MAP). For
additional information, refer to the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and
instructions.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special per-
mission to enable text messaging. Check
the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®
pairing. For some phones, you may need
to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
appear on the headunit. For additional
information, refer to your phone’s Own-
er’s manual. Text message integration
requires that the phone support MAP
(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-
ing and sending text messages. Some
phones may not support all text mes-
saging features. For additional informa-
tion, please refer to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-
ibility information, as well as your de-
vice’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and re-
ceiving of text messages through the ve-
hicle interface.
Sending a text message:
1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
4. The system will provide a list of avail-
able commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:
∙ To (a name)
∙ Enter Number
∙ Missed Calls
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
For additional information about these
options, refer to “Voice commands” in
this section.
5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Nine predefined messages are avail-
able as well as three custom mes-
sages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following
after the tone:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”
∙ “Call me”
∙ “On my way”
∙ “Running late”
∙ “Okay”
∙ “Yes”
∙ “No”
∙ “Where are you?”
∙ “When?”
∙ “Custom Messages”
To send one of the custom messages,
say “Custom Messages”. If more than
one custom message is stored, the sys-
tem will prompt for the number of the
desired custom message. For additional
information on setting and managing
custom text messages, refer to
“Bluetooth® settings” in this section.
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Reading a received text message:
1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel.
2. Say “Phone” after the tone.
3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The text message, sender and delivery
time are shown on the screen. Use the tun-
ing switch to scroll through all text mes-
sages if more than one are available. Press
the
button to exit the text message
screen. Press the
button to access
the following options for replying to the text
message:
∙ Call Back
Speak this command to call the sender
of the text message using the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
∙ Send Text
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
∙ Read Text
Speak this command to read the text
message again.
∙ Previous Text
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙ Next Text
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).
Siri® Eyes Free
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
it can also be used to create custom mes-
sages that are sent through the phone. For
additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
Free” in this section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
Menu Item Result
Phone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.
Connect New Device Touch to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Select Connected Device Touch to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Replace Connected Device Touch to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Delete Connected Device Touch to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Bluetooth Touch to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.
LHA2844
4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
PHONE SETTINGS
To access the phone settings:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.
4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and ad-
just the following settings as desired:
∙ Start Siri® by:
Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to
set how Siri® is operated on the steering
wheel.
∙ Sort Phonebook By:
Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to
choose how phonebook entries are al-
phabetically displayed on the screen.
∙ Use Phonebook From:
Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s
phonebook. Touch “SIM” to use the
phonebook on the SIM card. Select
“Both” to use both sources.
∙ Download Phonebook Now:
Touch to download the phonebook to
the vehicle from the chosen source.
∙ Record Name for Phonebook Entry:
Touch to record a name for a phone-
book entry for use with the NISSAN
Voice Recognition System.
∙ Phone Notifications for:
Touch “Driver” to have phone notifica-
tions shown in the vehicle information
display. Select “Both” to have phone no-
tifications shown in both the vehicle in-
formation display and the center dis-
play screen.
∙ Text Messaging (if so equipped):
Touch to toggle the text message func-
tionality on or off.
∙ Show Incoming Text for (if so equipped):
Touch “Driver” to have incoming text no-
tifications shown in the vehicle informa-
tion display. Touch “Both” to have text
notifications shown in both the vehicle
information display and the center dis-
play screen. Touch “Off” to turn off all
text notifications.
∙ Auto Reply (if so equipped):
Touch to toggle the auto reply function-
ality on or off.
∙ Auto Reply Message (if so equipped):
Touch to indicate preferred message to
be sent when “Auto Reply” function is
activated.
∙ Use Vehicle’s Signature (if so equipped):
Touch to toggle on or off the addition of
the vehicle signature to outgoing mes-
sages.
∙ Custom Text Messages (if so equipped):
Touch this option to select a custom
message to edit. There are 4 customer
message slots available.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If prob-
lems are encountered, try the following so-
lutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with num-
ber 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this
section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in
the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).
NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from
the phone book.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The NISSAN Voice Recognition System al-
lows hands-free operation of the systems
equipped on this vehicle, such as the
phone and navigation systems.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
press the
button located on the
steering wheel. When prompted, speak the
command for the system you wish to acti-
vate. The command given is picked up by
the microphone and performed when it is
properly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recog-
nition will provide a voice response as well
as a message in the center display to in-
form you of the command results.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When com-
pleted, the system is ready to accept voice
commands. If the
button is pressed
before the initialization completes, the sys-
tem will announce: “Voice Recognition Sys-
tem not ready. Please wait.”
Giving voice commands
1. Press the button.
2. The system announces: “Please say a
category like phone or a command like
points of interest followed by a brand
name”. A list of available commands is
then spoken by the system.
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon
on the display changes, speak a com-
mand. Available commands are dis-
cussed in this section.
4. Voice and display feedback are pro-
vided when the command is accepted.
∙ If the command is not recognized, the
system announces: “Command not
recognized”. Repeat the command in a
clear voice.
∙ If you want to cancel the command or
go back to the previous menu of com-
mands, press the
button. The sys-
tem will announce: “Canceling Voice
Recognition” or “Go back” depending on
the current menu level.
∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, use the volume control
switches on the steering wheel or the
volume knob on the control panel.
∙ The voice command screen can also be
accessed using the control panel dis-
play:
1. Press the [
] button.
2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.
LHA3918
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of NISSAN
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to elimi-
nate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recogniz-
ing the voice commands correctly.
∙ Wait until a tone sounds before speak-
ing a command. Otherwise, the com-
mand will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-
ing between words.
SYSTEM FEATURES
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the
following systems:
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
∙ Navigation
∙ Audio
∙ Information
∙ My Apps
∙ Help
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a cer-
tain way to speak numbers in voice com-
mands. Refer to the following examples.
General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be
used for “0”.
Phone numbers
Speak phone numbers according to the
following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say
dial number and then speak the phone
number in any of the following formats:
∙ “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”
∙ “one eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”
∙ “one eight zero zero six six two six two
oh oh”
For the best voice recognition phone dial-
ing results, say phone numbers as single
digits. Also, full numbers can only be spo-
ken for “800”. For example, you cannot say
555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”.
LHA4373
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System voice commands:
1. Press the
button.
2. Say “Call” and then a name in the ve-
hicle phonebook to call that entry. Oth-
erwise, say “Phone” to access various
phone commands.
If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the
system announces: “Bluetooth® is off.
Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”
If no phone is connected to the system and
the vehicle is stationary, the system an-
nounces: “There is no phone connected.
Would you like to connect a phone now?”
Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All further
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
voice commands are only available if a
phone is connected.
If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is
set to “On”, the following voice commands
are available:
∙ Call (a name)
Speak the name of the contact in
which you are trying to call. System will
confirm correct contact. Say “Dial” to
initiate dialing.
∙ Dial Number
Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed.
After the number is entered, say “Dial”
to initiate dialing. Say “Correction” to
correct the number entered. Say “Go
Back” to return to the main menu.
∙ List Phonebook
Starting with the first alphabetical en-
try in the vehicle phonebook, the sys-
tem prompts for an additional com-
mand. Say “Dial” to call the number of
the phonebook entry. Say “Send Text”
to send a text message to the number
of the phonebook entry. Say “Next En-
try” to skip to the next alphabetical en-
try in the vehicle phonebook, where
the same options will then be available.
∙ Recent Calls
The system prompts for an additional
command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incom-
ing Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display
a list of such calls on the screen.
Speak the number of the entry dis-
played on the screen to dial that num-
ber or say “Next Page” to view entries
on the next page (if available).
∙ Redial
Redials the last called number.
∙ Read Text (if so equipped)
Reads an incoming text message. For
additional information about text
messaging with the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem with Navigation System” in this
section.
∙ Send Text (if so equipped)
Sends a text message. For additional
information about text messaging
with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System with Navigation
System” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
∙ Select Phone
The system replies “Please use manual
controls to continue”. Use manual con-
trols to change the active phone from
among the listed phones connected
to the vehicle.
∙ Siri (if so equipped)
The system replies “Starting Siri”. For
additional information, refer to “Oper-
ating Siri ®Eyes Free” in this section.
For additional information about the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, re-
fer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem with Navigation System” in this sec-
tion.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE
COMMANDS
The following voice commands are avail-
able for the navigation system:
∙ Street Address (address)
∙ Points of Interest (name)
∙ POI by Category
∙ Home
∙ Address Book
∙ Previous Destinations
∙ Enter Address in Steps
∙ Cancel Route
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS
To access the audio system voice com-
mands:
1. Press the
button.
2. Say “Audio”
3. Speak a command from the following
available commands:
∙ Play (AM, FM, etc.)
Allows user to select radio band
∙ Tune AM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
AM frequency
∙ Tune FM (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
FM frequency
∙ SXM channel (number)
Allows user to tune directly to a desired
SXM station (if so equipped)
∙ CD Track (number)
Allows user to select track to be played
∙ Play Song (name)
Allows user to select song name to be
played
∙ Play Artist (name)
Allows user to select artist to be played
∙ Play Album (name)
Allows user to select album name to
be played
For additional information, refer to “Audio
system” in this section.
4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands are avail-
able for the information functions of the
navigation system:
∙ Traffic
∙ Fuel Prices
∙ Stocks
∙ Movie Listings
∙ Current Weather
∙ Weather Map
∙ 5—dayForecast
∙ 6 — hour Forecast
∙ Connect to Voice Menu (if so equipped)
∙ Additional Commands
For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS
Many Apps can be accessed using this
voice command. For additional informa-
tion, refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owners Manual.
HELP VOICE COMMANDS
The following voice commands can be
spoken to have the system provide in-
structions and tips for using the NISSAN
Voice Recognition System.
∙ List Commands
∙ What Can I Say?
∙ General Help
∙ Go Back
∙ Quit
∙ Exit
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all
voice commands without difficulty. If prob-
lems are encountered, follow the solutions
given in this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number,
try each solution in turn, starting with num-
ber one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Solution
The system responds “Command
Not Recognized” or the system fails
to recognize the command
correctly.
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help”
menu.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MEMO
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-2
Three-way catalyst ...........................5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)........................................5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover ................5-7
Off-roadrecovery ............................5-7
Rapid air pressure loss .......................5-8
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-8
Ignition switch (if so equipped)...................5-9
Continuously Variable Transmission
(if so equipped) ...............................5-9
Manual transmission (M/T)
(if so equipped) ..............................5-10
Ignition switch positions.....................5-10
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ..........5-11
Push-Button Ignition Switch (if so equipped) .....5-11
Operating range.............................5-12
Push-button ignition switch positions .......5-12
Emergency engine shut off ..................5-13
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
discharge ...................................5-13
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........5-14
Before starting the engine......................5-14
Starting the engine (models without NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system) ........................5-15
Starting the engine (models with NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system) ........................5-16
Driving the vehicle ..............................5-17
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) (if so equipped) ........................ 5-17
Manual transmission (if so equipped) ........5-23
Parking brake ..................................5-25
SPORT mode switch (if so equipped)............5-26
ECO mode switch (if so equipped) ..............5-26
Shift lever indicator (MRA8DE engine
Manual Transmission models only) ..........5-27
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) .......5-27
BSW system operation ......................5-29
How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-30
BSW system limitations......................5-31
BSW driving situations .......................5-32
System temporarily unavailable .............5-35
System maintenance........................5-36
R
ear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-37
RCTA system operation......................5-38
How to enable/disable the RCTA
system ......................................5-40
RCTA system limitations .....................5-41
System temporarily unavailable .............5-43
System maintenance........................5-44
Cruise control (if so equipped) ..................5-45
Precautions on cruise control................5-45
Cruise control operations....................5-46
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-47
ICC system operation .......................5-48
The ICC switch ..............................5-50
ICC system limitations.......................5-56
System temporarily unavailable .............5-59
System maintenance........................5-61
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) (if so
equipped) ......................................5-62
AEB system operation .......................5-63
Turning the AEB system on/off ..............5-65
AEB system limitations ......................5-65
System temporarily unavailable .............5-66
System malfunction .........................5-67
System maintenance........................5-67
Break-in schedule ..............................5-68
Fuel efficient driving tips ........................5-68
Increasing fuel economy .......................5-70
Parking/parking on hills ........................5-70
Power steering .................................5-71
Brake system...................................5-72
Brake precautions ...........................5-72
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..............5-73
Brake assist .................................5-74
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........5-74
Rise-up and build-up ........................5-76
Brake force distribution......................5-76
Cold weather driving ...........................5-77
Freeing a frozen door lock ...................5-77
Antifreeze ...................................5-77
Battery......................................5-77
Draining of coolant water....................5-77
Tir
e equipment ..............................5-77
Special winter equipment ...................5-78
Driving on snow or ice .......................5-78
Engine block heater (if so equipped) .........5-78
WARNING
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously
injured. Keep the car locked, with the
rear seatback and trunk lid securely
latched when not in use, and prevent
children’s access to car keys.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-
gerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.
∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all
windows fully open, and have the ve-
hicle inspected immediately.
∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-
gine running for any extended length
of time.
∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise ex-
haust gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must
drive with one of these open, follow
these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the
air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the trunk lid or the
body, follow the manufacturer’s rec-
ommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.
∙ The exhaust system and body should
be inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system,
underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission con-
trol device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
are burned at high temperatures to help
reduce pollutants.
WARNING
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-
mals or flammable materials away
from the exhaust system
components.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
5-2 Starting and driving
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability
to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if no-
ticeable loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are de-
tected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damag-
ing the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not race the engine while warming
it up.
∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-
rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illu-
minated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-
tion indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
ing the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Starting and driving 5-3
Additional information:
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of
the spare tire.
∙ The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may
not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-
sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-
ing).
∙ The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure of all your tires is adjusted. Af-
ter the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn
off the low tire pressure warning light.
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure.
∙ The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (TypeA-ifso
equipped) or the “Tire Pressure Low-
AddAir”(TypeB-ifsoequipped) warn-
ing message is displayed in the odom-
eter when the low tire pressure warning
light is illuminated and low tire pressure
is detected. The “CHECK TIRE PRES”
(TypeA-ifsoequipped) or the “Tire
Pressure Low- Add Air” (TypeB-ifso
equipped) warning message turns off
when the low tire pressure warning light
turns off. The low tire pressure warning
light remains illuminated until the tires
are inflated to the recommended COLD
tire pressure. The “CHECK TIRE PRES”
(TypeA-ifsoequipped) or the “Tire
Pressure Low- Add Air” (TypeB-ifso
equipped) warning message is dis-
played each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the
low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated.
∙ The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (TypeA-ifso
equipped) or the “Tire Pressure Low-
AddAir”(TypeB-ifsoequipped) warn-
ing is not displayed if the low tire pres-
sure warning light illuminates to indi-
cate a TPMS malfunction.
∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-
eration and the outside temperature.
Do not reduce the tire pressure after
driving because the tire pressure rises
after driving. Low outside temperature
can lower the temperature of the air
inside the tire which can cause a lower
tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illumi-
nates, check the tire pressure for all four
tires.
∙ The Tire and Loading Information label
is located in the driver’s door opening.
For additional information, refer to “Check
tire pressure warning message” or “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
5-4 Starting and driving
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-
ing with under-inflated tires may per-
manently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label to turn the low tire pres-
sure warning light off. If you have a flat
tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon
as possible. (For additional informa-
tion on changing a flat tire, refer to
“Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.)
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning
light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS reset as soon as pos-
sible. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
sure sensors.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-
dows. This may cause poor reception of
the signals from the tire pressure sen-
sors, and the TPMS will not function
properly.
Some devices and transmitters may tem-
porarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-
lar radio frequencies are near the ve-
hicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-
cies is being used in or near the vehicle.
∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases:
∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
Starting and driving 5-5
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert (if so
equipped)
When adding air to an under-inflated tire,
the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides
visual and audible signals outside the ve-
hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec-
ommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
shift lever in the P (Park) position (if so
equipped).
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition. Do not start the engine.
Operation:
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-
tors will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is
reached, the horn beeps once and the
hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than
approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators
flash three times. To correct the pres-
sure, push the core of the valve stem
on the tire briefly to release pressure.
When the pressure reaches the des-
ignated pressure, the horn beeps
once.
∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds af-
ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi-
cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is
not operating.
∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy-
Fill Tire Alert under the following con-
ditions:
– If there is interference from an exter-
nal device or transmitter.
– The air pressure from the inflation
device is not sufficient to inflate the
tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS
system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or
hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tire’s
pressure sensor is not registered to
the system.
5-6 Starting and driving
– The battery of the tire pressure sen-
sor is low.
∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op-
erate due to TPMS interference, move
the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward
or forward and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a
tire pressure gauge.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
steering maneuvers, because these driving
practices could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes
the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the in-
fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which
may cause drowsiness). Always wear your
seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-
tem” section of this manual, and also in-
struct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
is significantly more likely to be injured
or killed than a person properly wearing
a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side
wheels may unintentionally leave the road
surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
the vehicle by following the procedure be-
low. Please note that this procedure is only
a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
as appropriate based on the conditions of
the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road
surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires re-
turn to the road surface. When all tires
are on the road surface, steer the ve-
hicle to stay in the appropriate driving
lane.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-
turn the vehicle to the road surface
based on vehicle, road or traffic con-
ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a
stop in a safe place off the road.
Starting and driving 5-7
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving
on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-
dling and stability of the vehicle, especially
at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspecting the tires for wear and
damage. For additional information, refer
to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,
maintain control of the vehicle by following
the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The ve-
hicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
traffic.
WARNING
If there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-
sure, the vehicle will generally move or
pull in the direction of the flat tire. In this
situation, losing control of the vehicle
may cause a collision and result in per-
sonal injury.
To help avoid loss of control:
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe
location off the road and away from
traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-
ally stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
and contact a roadside emergency
service to change the tire. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Changing a
flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alco-
hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream
reduces coordination, delays reaction
time and impairs judgement. Driving
after drinking alcohol increases the
likelihood of being involved in an acci-
dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-
tionally, if you are injured in an accident,
alcohol can increase the severity of the
injury.
5-8 Starting and driving
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-
ever, you must choose not to drive under
the influence of alcohol. Every year thou-
sands of people are injured or killed in
alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo-
cal laws vary on what is considered to be
legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most
people underestimate the effects of alco-
hol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.
WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the
LOCK position while driving. The steer-
ing wheel will lock (for models with a
steering lock mechanism). This may
cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle and could result in serious ve-
hicle damage or personal injury.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch cannot be turned to the
LOCK position until the shift lever is moved
to the P (Park) position.
∙ When moving the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position.
∙ When removing the key from the igni-
tion switch, make sure the shift lever is
in the P (Park) position.
WSD0041
IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-9
When the ignition switch cannot be turned
to the LOCK position:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the
ON direction.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the
ignition switch.
If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position.
The shift lever can be moved if the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON position
and the foot brake pedal is depressed.
There is an OFF position between the
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF posi-
tion is indicated by a “1” on the key cylin-
der.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (M/T) (if
so equipped)
The ignition switch includes a device that
helps prevent accidental removal of the
key while driving.
The key can only be removed when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
On M/T models, to turn the ignition key to
the LOCK position from the ACC or ON po-
sition, turn the key to the OFF position, push
the key in, then turn the key to the LOCK
position.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked,
it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clock-
wise from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key
to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
and turn it gently while rotating the
steering wheel slightly right and left.
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (1)
The engine can be turned off without lock-
ing the steering wheel.
ACC: (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accesso-
ries such as the radio when the engine is
not running.
ON: Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system
and the electrical accessories.
START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as
the engine has started, release the key. It
automatically returns to the ON position.
WSD0052
5-10 Starting and driving
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an auto-
mated toll road device or automatic pay-
ment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the in-
terference) separate from the regis-
tered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button igni-
tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-
cept in an emergency. (The engine will
stop when the ignition switch is pushed
three consecutive times in quick suc-
cession or the ignition switch is pushed
and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the
engine stops while the vehicle is being
driven, this could lead to a crash and
serious injury.
When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal or the clutch
pedal for manual transmission (M/T) mod-
els, the ignition switch position will illumi-
nate as follows:
Push center:
∙ Once to change to ACC.
∙ Two times to change to ON.
∙ Three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically re-
turn to the LOCK position when any door is
either opened or closed with the switch in
the OFF position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the
ignition switch position cannot be placed
in the OFF position until the shift lever is
moved to the P (Park) position or N (Neutral)
position (M/T).
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed
toward the OFF position, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position or N (Neutral) position (M/T).
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition
switch position will change to the ON
position.
LSD2014
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if
so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-11
3. Push the ignition switch again to the
OFF position.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the ignition switch cannot be moved
from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for opera-
tion are displayed in the meter. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Warning lights,
indicator lights and audible reminders” in
the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are pres-
ent near the operating location, the Intelli-
gent Key system’s operating range be-
comes narrower and may not function
properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even some-
one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,
to push the ignition switch to start the en-
gine.
The operating range of the engine start
function is inside of the vehicle
䊊
1
.
∙ The luggage area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key
may function.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel or inside the glove
box, storage bin or door pocket, the In-
telligent Key may not function.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in
this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it
is pushed to the ACC position while carry-
ing the Intelligent Key.
The ignition switch will lock when any door
is opened or closed with the ignition
switched off.
LSD2089
5-12 Starting and driving
ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accesso-
ries, such as the radio, when the engine is
not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will
turn the ignition switch to the OFF position
after a period of time under the following
conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will turn
the ignition switch to the OFF position, if the
vehicle is not running, after some time un-
der the following conditions:
∙ All doors are closed.
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
∙ Any door is opened.
∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P
(Park) position.
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the igni-
tion switch in the ACC or ON position
when the engine is not running for an
extended period. This can discharge the
battery.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
when the engine is turned off using the
ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on
the ignition switch.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the follow-
ing procedure:
∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch three
consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-
onds, or
∙ Push and hold the ignition switch for
more than 2 seconds.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®
is discharged, or environmental conditions
interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,
start the engine according to the following
procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-
tion.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel-
ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will
sound.)
SSD0860
Starting and driving 5-13
After Step 3 is performed, when the
ignition switch is pushed without de-
pressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch position will change to the ACC
position.
4. Push the ignition switch while depress-
ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will
start.
NOTE:
∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ACC or ON position or the engine
is started by the above procedure, the
Intelligent Key battery discharge in-
dicator appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display even when the Intelli-
gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is
not a malfunction. To turn off the In-
telligent Key battery discharge indi-
cator, touch the ignition switch with
the Intelligent Key again.
∙ If the Intelligent Key battery dis-
charge indicator appears, replace the
battery as soon as possible. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an auto-
mated toll road device or automatic pay-
ment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the in-
terference) separate from the regis-
tered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,
coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so
equipped), and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least
whenever you refuel.
∙ Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-
ance and condition. Also check tires for
proper inflation.
∙ Lock all doors.
∙ Position seat and adjust head
restraints/headrests.
∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-
gers to do likewise.
∙ Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position. For additional information,
refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights
and audible reminders” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this
manual.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
5-14 Starting and driving
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
model:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position or if the
key is removed from the ignition
switch.
The starter is designed not to oper-
ate if the shift lever is in any of the
driving positions.
Manual transmission model:
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). De-
press the clutch pedal to the floor
while cranking the engine.
The starter is designed not to oper-
ate unless the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.
The Intelligent Key must be carried
when operating the ignition switch.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by turning the
ignition switch to the START position.
Release the switch when the engine
starts. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when re-
starting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and hold it and then crank the
engine. Release the switch and the
accelerator pedal when the engine
starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-
cause it is flooded, depress the accel-
erator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Crank the engine for
5-6 seconds. After cranking the en-
gine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by turning the
ignition switch to the START position.
Release the key when the engine
starts. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, turn the ignition switch
to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds
before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
a moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
STARTING THE ENGINE (models
without NISSAN Intelligent Key®
system)
Starting and driving 5-15
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to oper-
ate if the shift lever is in any of the
driving positions.
Manual Transmission (M/T):
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). De-
press the clutch pedal to the floor.
The starter is designed not to oper-
ate unless the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-
sition. Depress the brake pedal and the
clutch pedal (if so equipped) and push
the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push
and release the ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal with the
ignition switch in any position.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when re-
starting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and while holding, crank the en-
gine. Release the accelerator pedal
when the engine starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-
cause it is flooded, depress the accel-
erator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch
to the ON position to start cranking
the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. After
cranking the engine, release the ac-
celerator pedal. Crank the engine
with your foot off the accelerator
pedal by depressing the brake pedal
and pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine. If the engine starts,
but fails to run, repeat the above pro-
cedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, push the ignition switch
to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds
before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
a moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather. In cold
weather, keep the engine running for a
minimum of2-3minutes before shut-
ting it off. Starting and stopping the
engine over a short period of time may
make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position or to N (Neutral)
and apply the parking brake (M/T) and
push the ignition switch to the OFF po-
sition.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
STARTING THE ENGINE (models with
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system)
5-16 Starting and driving
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low)
(if so equipped). Always depress the
brake pedal until shifting is com-
pleted. Failure to do so could cause
you to lose control and have an
accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-
versing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.
CAUTION
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
ing. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause se-
rious damage to the transmission.
∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically
controlled to produce maximum power
and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures
for this transmission are shown on the fol-
lowing pages. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and driv-
ing enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
Starting the vehicle
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low)
(if so equipped). Always depress the
brake pedal until shifting is com-
pleted. Failure to do so could cause
you to lose control and have an
accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-
versing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Starting and driving 5-17
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
ing. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause se-
rious damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your ve-
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever into a driving
gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually
start the vehicle in motion.
4. Stop the vehicle completely before
moving the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
The Continuously Variable Transmission
is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST
be depressed before shifting from P
(Park) to any drive position while the ig-
nition switch is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear po-
sitions if the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the
keyisremoved.
Type A (if so equipped)
LSD2568
5-18 Starting and driving
To move the shift lever:
Press the button
䊊
A
while depressing
the brake pedal
Press the button
䊊
A
to shift
Shift without pressing the button
䊊
A
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever from P
(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal in-
jury or property damage.
If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC posi-
tion for any reason while the vehicle is in N
(Neutral), or any drive position, the key can-
not be turned to the LOCK position and be
removed from the ignition switch. If this
occurs, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the ve-
hicle is stopped.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) to park
the vehicle and turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK position to remove the key.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) position only when the ve-
hicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped. The brake pedal must be de-
pressed and the shift lever button
pressed in to move the shift lever from N
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a
hill, apply the parking brake first, then place
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the R (Reverse) position only when the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. The brake pedal must be de-
pressed and the shift lever button
pressed in to move the shift lever from P
(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to
R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-
gaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.
Type B (if so equipped)
LSD2673
Starting and driving 5-19
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.
L (Low) (if so equipped)
Use this position for maximum engine
braking on steep downhill
gradients/climbing steep slopes and
whenever approaching sharp bends. Do
not use the L (Low) position in any other
circumstances.
Manual shift mode (if so
equipped)
When the shift lever is in the manual shift
gate, the transmission is ready for the
manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be
selected manually by moving the shift le-
ver up or down. To cancel manual shift
mode, return the shift lever to the D (Drive)
position. The transmission returns to auto-
matic driving mode.
When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive)
to the manual shift gate with the vehicle
stopped or while driving, the transmission
enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges
can be selected manually. In the manual
shift mode, the shift range is displayed on
the position indicator in the meter. When
moving the shift lever to the manual shift
gate, the position indicator displays 1 (1st)
up to 7 (7th) depending on vehicle speed.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7
M7 (7th)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving at highway speeds.
M6 (6th) and M5 (5th)
Use this position when driving up long
slopes, or for engine braking when driving
down long slopes.
M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd)
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on
downhill grades.
M1 (1st)
Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,
sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak-
ing on steep downhill grades.
∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds
for extended periods of time in lower
than 6 range. This reduces fuel
economy.
When shifting up
Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)
When shifting down
Move the shift lever to the ⫺ (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)
∙ Moving the shift lever rapidly to the
same side twice will shift the ranges in
succession.
∙ The transmission will automatically
downshift the gears. (For example, if you
select the 3rd range, the transmission
will shift down between the 3rd and 1st
gears.)
When canceling the manual shift mode
Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) posi-
tion to return the transmission to the nor-
mal driving mode.
∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans-
mission may not shift to the selected
gear. This helps maintain driving per-
formance and reduces the chance of
vehicle damage or loss of control.
5-20 Starting and driving
∙ When this situation occurs, the Con-
tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light will blink and
the chime will sound.
∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans-
mission may shift up automatically to
a higher range than selected if the
engine speed is too high. When the
vehicle speed decreases, the trans-
mission automatically shifts down
and shifts to 1st gear before the ve-
hicle comes to a stop.
∙ CVT operation is limited to automatic
drive mode when CVT fluid tempera-
ture is extremely low even if manual
shift mode is selected. This is not a mal-
function. When CVT fluid warms up,
manual mode can be selected.
∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high,
the shift range may upshift in lower
rpm than usual. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged,
the shift lever may not be moved from the
P (Park) position even with the brake pedal
depressed and the shift lever button
pressed.
It will be necessary to jump start or have
your battery charged. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you contact a
NISSAN dealer or a professional towing ser-
vice.
To move the shift lever, complete the fol-
lowing procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a
3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift
lock release cover.
∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also
be used.
4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift
lock release slot and push down.
5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift
lock release.
6. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-
sition to unlock the steering wheel.
Now the vehicle may be moved to the
desired location.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have the transmission checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LSD2569
Starting and driving 5-21
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is de-
pressed, the stop lights may not work.
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
an accident injuring yourself and
others.
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with
the shift lever in the D (Drive) position,
the
light in the instrument panel illu-
minates. For additional information, refer
to “Overdrive OFF indicator light (CVT mod-
els)” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion of this manual.
Use the Overdrive OFF mode when you
need improved engine braking.
To turn off the Overdrive OFF mode, push
the O/D OFF switch again. The
indi-
cator light will turn off.
Each time the engine is started, or when
the shift lever is shifted to any position
other than D (Drive), the Overdrive OFF
mode will be automatically turned off.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts
the transmission down into a lower gear,
depending on the vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may come on to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section of this manual. This will oc-
cur even if all electrical circuits are func-
tioning properly. In this case, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait for 10 seconds. Then push the
switch back to the ON position. The ve-
hicle should return to its normal operat-
ing condition. If it does not return to its
LSD2620
5-22 Starting and driving
normal operating condition, have the
transmission checked and repaired, if
necessary. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature pro-
tection mode or fail-safe operation oc-
curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re-
duced.The reduced speed may be lower
than other traffic, which could increase
the chance of a collision. Be especially
careful when driving. If necessary, pull
to the side of the road at a safe place
and allow the transmission to return to
normal operation, or have it repaired if
necessary.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Do not over-rev the engine when
shifting to a lower gear. This may
cause a loss of control or engine
damage.
∙ Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position
while driving. Doing so may result in
an accident due to loss of engine
braking.
CAUTION
∙ Do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal while driving. This may cause
clutch damage.
∙ Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
∙ Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
∙ When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.
∙ Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position
while driving. Doing so may result in
an accident due to loss of engine
braking.
Shifting
To change gears or when upshifting or
downshifting, depress the clutch pedal
fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then
release the clutch slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully de-
press the clutch pedal before operating the
shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully
depressed before the transmission is
shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans-
mission damage may occur.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,
3rd, 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence
according to vehicle speed.
SSD0552
Starting and driving 5-23
To back up, lift up on the shift lever ring
䊊
1
and then move it to the R (Reverse) position
after stopping the vehicle completely.
The shift lever ring
䊊
1
returns to its original
position when the shift lever is moved to
the N (Neutral) position.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Depress the
clutch pedal again and shift into R (Re-
verse) or 1 (1st).
Suggested up-shift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle
speeds for shifting into a higher gear.
These suggestions relate to fuel economy
and vehicle performance. Actual upshift
speeds will vary according to road condi-
tions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
MRA8DE engine models (6 M/T)
GEAR Change mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 8(13)
2nd to 3rd 17 (27)
3rd to 4th 25 (40)
4th to 5th 36 (58)
5th to 6th 51 (82)
MR16DDT engine models (6 M/T)
GEAR Change mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 13 (21)
2nd to 3rd 22 (35)
3rd to 4th 30 (48)
4th to 5th 35 (56)
5th to 6th 42 (68)
Suggested maximum speed in
each gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is
not running smoothly, or if you need to ac-
celerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested
speed (shown below) in any gear. For level
road driving, use the highest gear sug-
gested for that speed. Always observe
posted speed limits, and drive according to
the road conditions, which will ensure safe
operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may
cause engine damage or loss of vehicle
control.
MRA8DE engine models (6 M/T)
GEAR mph (km/h)
1st 30 (48)
2nd 52 (84)
3rd 73 (117)
4th 94 (152)
5th —
6th —
MR16DDT engine models (6 M/T)
GEAR mph (km/h)
1st 29 (46)
2nd 47 (75)
3rd 68 (108)
4th 90 (145)
5th —
6th —
5-24 Starting and driving
WARNING
∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
∙ Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
To engage: Pull the lever up
䊊
A
.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
Continuously Variable Transmission
models:
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
sition.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake
lever slightly, press the button and
lower completely
䊊
B
.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-
ing light goes out.
LSD2197
PARKING BRAKE
Starting and driving 5-25
The SPORT mode switch adjusts the
throttle sensitivity and transmission points
to enhance performance. Push the SPORT
mode switch on the instrument panel to
activate. The SPORT mode indicator light
(on the speedometer) will illuminate. The
SPORT mode indicator light will remain lit
while the mode is active.
NOTE:
In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may
be reduced.
The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel
economy by controlling the throttle sensi-
tivity and transmission points.
To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO
mode switch. The ECO mode indicator light
(on the meter or vehicle information dis-
play) will remain lit while the mode is active.
To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO
mode switch again. The ECO mode indica-
tor light (on the meter or vehicle informa-
tion display) will turn off.
The ECO mode cannot be turned off while
the accelerator pedal is depressed, even if
the ECO mode switch is pushed off. Release
the accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO
mode.
The ECO mode will turn off automatically if
a malfunction occurs in the system.
Turn off the ECO mode, or depress the ac-
celerator pedal fully when:
∙ Driving with a heavy load of passengers
or cargo in the vehicle
∙ Driving on a steep uphill slope
∙ ECO mode may affect air conditioner
performance
NOTE:
Selecting this drive mode will not neces-
sarily improve fuel economy as many
driving factors influence its effective-
ness.
LIC2417 LIC2416
SPORT MODE SWITCH (if so
equipped)
ECO MODE SWITCH (if so equipped)
5-26 Starting and driving
SHIFT LEVER INDICATOR (MRA8DE
engine Manual Transmission
models only)
The shift lever indicator is used to support
the suitable timing of gear change. It oper-
ates only when the ECO mode is on.
The shift indicator icon and recommended
gear position are displayed.
The shift indicator icon indicates when to
upshift or downshift for fuel economy.
NOTE:
∙ The shift indicator is a guide for fuel
economy. Always pay attention to
road conditions and other traffic.
∙ Downshift the indicator icon to the 1
(1st) position if not displayed.
∙ If the downshifting icon is displayed
when decreasing your vehicle speed,
it indicates that the engine speed is
low compared to the gear position.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the BSW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The BSW system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When changing
lanes, always use the side and rear
mirrors and turn and look in the direc-
tion your vehicle will move to ensure it
is safe to change lanes. Never rely
solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when
changing lanes.
LSD2143
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so
equipped)
Starting and driving 5-27
The BSW system uses radar sensors
䊊
1
installed near the rear bumper to detect
other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
either side of your vehicle within the detec-
tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-
tion zone starts from the outside mirror of
your vehicle and extends approximately
10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and
approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.
LSD2692
Detection zone
SSD1030
5-28 Starting and driving
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approxi-
mately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-
tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is
then activated, the system chimes (twice)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes. The BSW indicator light continues
to flash until the detected vehicles leaves
the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-
nates for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-
cator light is adjusted automatically de-
pending on the brightness of the ambient
light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal,
then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-
tional information, refer to “BSW driving
situations” in this section.
LSD2624
Starting and driving 5-29
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the BSW system.
1. Press the
button until “Settings”
displays in the vehicle information dis-
play. Use the
button to select
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-
TER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN-
TER button.
3. Select “Blind Spot/RCTA” and press the
ENTER button.
NOTE:
∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system will retain current set-
tings even if the engine is restarted.
∙ The RCTA system (if so equipped) is
integrated into the BSW system.
There is not a separate selection in
the vehicle information display for
the RCTA system. When the BSW is
disabled, the RCTA system is also dis-
abled.
LSD2622
5-30 Starting and driving
∙ When the BSW system is turned on,
the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the
vehicle information display illumi-
nates.
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the BSW system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve-
hicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensors may not be able to
detect and activate BSW when certain
objects are present such as:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground
clearance vehicles.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detec-
tion zone when you accelerate
from a stop.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind.
– A vehicle which your vehicle over-
takes rapidly.
– A vehicle that passes through the
detection zone quickly.
– When overtaking several vehicles
in a row, the vehicles after the first
vehicle may not be detected if they
are traveling close together.
∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is
designed based on a standard lane
width. When driving in a wider lane,
the radar sensors may not detect ve-
hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-
ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensors
may detect vehicles driving two lanes
away.
∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig-
nore most stationary objects; how-
ever, objects such as guardrails, walls,
foliage and parked vehicles may oc-
casionally be detected. This is a nor-
mal operation condition.
∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the
vehicle
∙ Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install accesso-
ries or apply additional paint near the
radar sensors. These conditions may
reduce the ability of the radar to de-
tect other vehicles.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume, open vehicle window)
will interfere with the chime sound,
and it may not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-31
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator
on
Indicator
off
Indicator
flashing
Another vehicle approaching
from behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-
tection zone from behind in an adjacent
lane.
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the
turn signal when another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ The radar sensors may not detect ve-
hicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
LSD2299
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
LSD2300
5-32 Starting and driving
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu-
minates if you overtake a vehicle and that
vehicle stays in the detection zone for ap-
proximately 2 seconds.
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are trav-
eling close together.
∙ The radar sensors may not detect
slower moving vehicles if they are
passed quickly.
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.
Illustration3–Overtaking another ve-
hicle
LSD2302
Illustration4–Overtaking another ve-
hicle
LSD2303
Starting and driving 5-33
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu-
minates if a vehicle enters the detection
zone from either side.
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.
∙ The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle when it
enters the detection zone.
Illustration 5 – Entering from the side
LSD2305
Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
LSD2308
5-34 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the sys-
tem will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator
(white) will blink
䊊
A
in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
The system is not available until the condi-
tions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-
tion may also be caused by objects such as
ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sen-
sors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
LSD2623
Starting and driving 5-35
Malfunction
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn
off automatically. The system malfunction
warning message with the BSW/RCTA indi-
cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in-
formation display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the
engine off and restart the engine. If the
message continues to appear, have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors
䊊
1
for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-
dar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transpar-
ent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC : OAYSRR2B
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment
LSD2692
5-36 Starting and driving
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the RCTA
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When backing out
of a parking space, always use the
side and rear mirrors and turn and
look in the direction your vehicle will
move. Never rely solely on the RCTA
system.
The RCTA system will assist you when
backing out from a parking space. When
the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-
signed to detect other vehicles approach-
ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the
system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
(if so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-37
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver
of an approaching vehicle when the driver
is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is
operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from either side, the system chimes (once)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes on the side the vehicle is approach-
ing from.
LSD2624
5-38 Starting and driving
The RCTA system uses radar sensors
䊊
1
installed on both sides near the rear bum-
per to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors
䊊
1
can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m) away.
LSD2216 LSD2692
Starting and driving 5-39
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the RCTA system.
1. Press the
button until “Settings”
displays in the vehicle information dis-
play. Use the
button to select
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-
TER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN-
TER button.
3. Select “Blind Spot/RCTA” and press the
ENTER button.
When the RCTA system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle
information display illuminates.
NOTE:
∙ The RCTA system is integrated into
the BSW system. There is not a sepa-
rate selection in the vehicle informa-
tion display for the RCTA system.
When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA
system is also disabled.
∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system setting will be retained
even if the engine is restarted.
LSD2622
5-40 Starting and driving
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the RCTA system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
∙ Always check surroundings and turn
to check what is behind you before
backing up. The radar sensors detect
approaching (moving) vehicles. The
radar sensors cannot detect every
object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy
vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater than approximately
19 mph (30 km/h)
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
∙ The radar sensors may not detect ap-
proaching vehicles in certain
situations:
– Illustration a: When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the
beam of the radar sensor.
LSD2173
Starting and driving 5-41
– Illustration b: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
– Illustration c: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
– Illustration d: When an approach-
ing vehicle turns into your vehicle’s
parking lot aisle.
– Illustration e: When the angle
formed by your vehicle and ap-
proaching vehicle is small.
∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
–
Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle
∙ Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install accesso-
ries or apply additional paint near the
radar sensors. These conditions may
reduce the ability of the radar to de-
tect other vehicles.
∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system
volume, open vehicle window) will in-
terfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approach-
ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-
site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may
not be sounded by the RCTA system af-
ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.
Illustration 1
LSD2043
Illustration 2
LSD2044
5-42 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the sys-
tem will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator
(white) will blink
䊊
A
in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
The systems are not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
LSD2623
Starting and driving 5-43
Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will
turn off automatically. The system mal-
function warning message with the
BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in
the vehicle information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system (if so equipped) will also
stop working.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the
engine off and restart the engine. If the
message continues to appear, have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors
䊊
1
for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-
dar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transpar-
ent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC : OAYSRR2B
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment
LSD2692
5-44 Starting and driving
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard
(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-
tions, it cancels automatically. The
CRUISE or
indicator light in the in-
strument panel then blinks to warn the
driver. For additional information, refer
to “Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders” or “Vehicle informa-
tion display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
∙ If the CRUISE or
indicator light
blinks, push the ON/OFF switch off and
have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Type A (if so equipped)
LSD2430
Type B (if so equipped)
LSD2572
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-45
∙ The CRUISE or indicator light may
blink when the ON/OFF switch is
pushed ON while pushing the
ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL
switch. To properly set the cruise con-
trol system, use the following proce-
dures.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driv-
ing under the following conditions:
∙ When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.
∙ On winding or hilly roads.
∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
∙ In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-
out keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE or
indi-
cator light in the instrument panel comes
on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-
hicle to the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle
maintains the set speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-
ously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, drive without the
cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch, or
∙ Tap the brake pedal, or
∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The CRUISE
or
indicator light in the instrument
panel goes out.
The cruise control is automatically can-
celed if:
∙ You depress the brake or clutch pedal
while pushing the ACCEL/RES or
SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is
deleted from memory.
∙ The vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
∙ You depress the clutch pedal for
manual transmission models (M/T), or
move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (Con-
tinuously Variable Transmission).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the COAST/SET
switch.
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you
desire, release the switch.
∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed increases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
5-46 Starting and driving
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows to the desired speed.
∙ Push and release the COAST/SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
returns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the ICC sys-
tem could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist
the driver and is not a collision warn-
ing or avoidance device. It is the driv-
er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
∙ Always observe posted speed limits
and do not set the speed over them.
∙ Always drive carefully and attentively
when using the ICC system. Read and
understand the Owner’s Manual thor-
oughly before using the ICC system.
To avoid serious injury or death, do
not rely on the system to prevent ac-
cidents or to control the vehicle’s
speed in emergency situations. Do
not use the ICC system except in ap-
propriate road and traffic conditions.
The ICC system is intended to enhance the
operation of the vehicle when following a
vehicle traveling in the same lane and di-
rection.
The ICC system uses a radar sensor
䊊
A
located on the front of the vehicle to detect
vehicles traveling ahead.
If the radar sensor detects a slower moving
vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the
vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows
the vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The detection range of the sensor is ap-
proximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.
LSD2698
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
(if so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-47
ICC SYSTEM OPERATION
The ICC system maintains a selected dis-
tance from the vehicle in front of you within
the speed range 0 to 90 mph (0 to
144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set
speed can be selected by the driver be-
tween 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h), based
on road conditions.
The vehicle travels at the set speed when
the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is designed to maintain a
selected distance from the vehicle in front
of you and can reduce the speed to match
a slower vehicle ahead. The system will de-
celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the
vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC
system can only apply up to 40% of the
vehicle’s total braking power.
This system should only be used when traf-
fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re-
main fairly constant or when vehicle
speeds change gradually. If a vehicle
moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a
vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates,
the distance between vehicles may be-
come closer because the ICC system can-
not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.
If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a
LSD2564
5-48 Starting and driving
warning chime and blink the system dis-
play to notify the driver to take necessary
action.
For additional information, refer to “Ap-
proach warning” in this section.
The following items are controlled in the
ICC system:
∙ When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the ICC system maintains the
speed set by the driver. The set speed
range is between approximately 20 and
90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).
∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
the ICC system adjusts the speed to
maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the ve-
hicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
decelerates to a standstill within the
limitations of the system. The system
will cancel once it judges a standstill
with a warning chime.
∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has
moved out from its lane of travel, the
ICC system accelerates and maintains
vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach
stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
must pay attention to vehicle operation to
maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead when approaching toll gates or traf-
fic congestion.
When driving on the freeway at a set speed
and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed
to maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,
the ICC system will accelerate and main-
tain the speed up to the set speed. Pay
attention to the driving operation to main-
tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates
to the set speed.
Normally when controlling the distance to
a vehicle ahead, this system automatically
accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-
cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
SSD0254
Starting and driving 5-49
Depress the accelerator to properly accel-
erate your vehicle when acceleration is re-
quired for a lane change. Depress the brake
pedal when deceleration is required to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead due to its sudden braking or if a
vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us-
ing the ICC system.
THE ICC SWITCH
The system is operated by the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch and four control switches,
all mounted on the steering wheel.
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without eras-
ing the set speed.
2. ACCEL/RES switch:
Resumes set speed or increases
speed incrementally.
3. COAST/SET switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally.
4. DISTANCE switch:
Changes the vehicle’s following dis-
tance:
∙ Long
∙ Middle
∙ Short
5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:
Master switch to activate the system.
LSD2505
5-50 Starting and driving
The ICC system display and
indicators
The display is located between the speed-
ometer and tachometer.
1. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is dis-
played in km/h.
2. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:
∙ ICC system ON indicator (white): In-
dicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch is ON.
∙ ICC system SET indicator (green):
Indicates that the cruising speed is
set.
∙ ICC system warning (orange): Indi-
cates that there is a malfunction in
the ICC system.
3. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance be-
tween vehicles set with the distance
switch.
4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle
in front of you.
Operating ICC
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch
䊊
A
.
The ICC system ON indicator (white), set
distance indicator and set vehicle speed
indicator come on in a standby state for
setting.
LSD2565 LSD2576
Starting and driving 5-51
To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-
hicle to the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it. The ICC
system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead
detection indicator, set distance indicator
and set vehicle speed indicator
䊊
B
will
come on. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set
speed.
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed un-
der the following conditions, the system
cannot be set and the ICC indicators will
blink for approximately 2 seconds:
∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)
and a vehicle ahead is not detected
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or L (Low) (if so equipped) position
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When the brakes are operated by the
driver
When the COAST/SET switch is pushed un-
der the following conditions, the system
cannot be set.
A warning chime will sound and a message
will pop up:
∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system.
Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch to turn
off the ICC system and reset the ICC
switch by pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch again.)
For additional information about the
VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in this section.
∙ When ABS or VDC is operating
∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
system, make sure the wheels are no
longer slipping. Push the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICC sys-
tem, and reset the ICC system by push-
ing the CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.)
䊊
1
System set display with vehicle ahead
䊊
2
System set display without vehicle
ahead
Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-
hicle by controlling the throttle and apply-
ing the brakes to match the speed of a
slower vehicle ahead. The system then
controls the vehicle speed based on the
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the
driver selected distance.
LSD2577 LSD2566
5-52 Starting and driving
NOTE:
∙ The stoplights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.
∙ When the brake operates, a noise may
be heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-
hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.
The ICC system will also display the set
speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected
ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-
ates your vehicle to resume the previously
set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
maintains the set speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera-
tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the
ICC system is in operation, the system con-
trols the distance to that vehicle.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under
approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys-
tem will be canceled.
When passing another vehicle, the set
speed indicator
䊊
B
will flash when the ve-
hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve-
hicle detect indicator will turn off when the
area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to
the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the
ICC system, you can depress the accelera-
tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate
your vehicle rapidly.
䊊
1
System set display with vehicle ahead
䊊
2
System set display without vehicle
ahead
How to change the set vehicle
speed
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set ve-
hicle speed indicator will go out.
∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
∙ Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The
ICC indicators will go out.
LSD2575 LSD2566
Starting and driving 5-53
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the COAST/SET
switch.
∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
The set vehicle speed will increase by
approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for
Canada).
∙ Push, then quickly release the
ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will increase by ap-
proximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the COAST/SET switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
The set vehicle speed will decrease by
approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for
Canada).
∙ Push, then quickly release the
COAST/SET switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by ap-
proximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
will resume the last set cruising speed
when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph
(32 km/h).
How to change the set distance
to the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time depending on the traf-
fic conditions.
Each time the distance switch
䊊
A
is
pushed, the set distance will change to
long, middle, short and back to long again,
in that sequence.
LSD2510
5-54 Starting and driving
Distance Approximate distance at
60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]
1. Long 200 (60)
2. Middle 150 (45)
3. Short 90 (30)
∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle speed.
The higher the vehicle speed, the longer
the distance.
∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance
becomes “long.” (Each time the engine
is started, the initial setting becomes
“long.”)
Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-
hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-
tem warns the driver with the chime and
ICC system display. Decelerate by depress-
ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-
hicle distance if:
∙ The chime sounds.
∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator
blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in
some cases when there is a short distance
between vehicles. Some examples are:
∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing.
∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between ve-
hicles is increasing.
∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles
that are parked or moving slowly.
∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed,
overriding the system.
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when
the ICC sensor detects objects on the
side of the vehicle or on the side of the
road. This may cause the ICC system to
decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The
ICC sensor may detect these objects
when the vehicle is driven on winding
roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when
entering or exiting a curve. In these
cases you will have to manually control
the proper distance ahead of your ve-
hicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or
driving position in the lane) or traffic or ve-
hicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is
being driven with some damage).
LSD2636
Starting and driving 5-55
ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the ICC system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
∙ The ICC system is primarily intended
for use on straight, dry, open roads
with light traffic. It is not advisable to
use the ICC system in city traffic or
congested areas.
∙ The ICC system will not adapt auto-
matically to road conditions. This sys-
tem should be used in evenly flowing
traffic. Do not use the system on roads
with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in
heavy rain or in fog.
∙ As there is a performance limit to the
distance control function, never rely
solely on the ICC system. This system
does not correct careless, inattentive
or absentminded driving, or over-
come poor visibility in rain, fog, or
other bad weather. Decelerate the ve-
hicle speed by depressing the brake
pedal, depending on the distance to
the vehicle ahead and the surround-
ing circumstances in order to main-
tain a safe distance between vehicles.
∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,
the vehicle decelerates to a standstill
within the limitations of the system.
The system will cancel once it judges
that the vehicle has come to a stand-
still and sound a warning chime. To
prevent the vehicle from moving, the
driver must depress the brake pedal.
∙ Always pay attention to the operation
of the vehicle and be ready to manu-
ally control the proper following dis-
tance. The ICC system may not be able
to maintain the selected distance be-
tween vehicles (following distance) or
selected vehicle speed under some
circumstances.
SSD0252
5-56 Starting and driving
∙ The system may not detect the ve-
hicle in front of you in certain road or
weather conditions. To avoid acci-
dents, never use the ICC system under
the following conditions:
– On roads where the traffic is heavy
or there are sharp curves
– On slippery road surfaces such as
on ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.)
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to
the bumper around the distance
sensor
– On steep downhill roads (the ve-
hicle may go beyond the set ve-
hicle speed and frequent braking
may result in overheating the
brakes)
– On repeated uphill and downhill
roads
– When traffic conditions make it dif-
ficult to keep a proper distance be-
tween vehicles because of fre-
quent acceleration or deceleration
– Interference by other radar
sources
∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are
towing a trailer. The system may not
detect a vehicle ahead.
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a
vehicle or object can unexpectedly
come into the sensor detection zone
and cause automatic braking. Always
stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys-
tem where not recommended in this
warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the follow-
ing objects:
∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles
∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel
lane
The following are some conditions in which
the sensor cannot properly detect a ve-
hicle ahead and the system may not oper-
ate properly:
∙ When snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.
∙ When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of
your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automati-
cally check the sensor’s operation within
the limitations of the system.
The detection zone of the ICC sensor is
limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-
tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance detection mode to maintain the se-
lected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may
not be detected in the same lane ahead if
they are traveling offset from the centerline
of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the
lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the
lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may
have to manually control the proper dis-
tance away from the vehicle traveling
ahead.
Starting and driving 5-57
When driving on some roads, such as wind-
ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads
which are under construction, the ICC sen-
sor may detect vehicles in a different lane,
or may temporarily not detect a vehicle
traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC
system to decelerate or accelerate the ve-
hicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be af-
fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-
neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)
or vehicle condition.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime unexpectedly. You
will have to manually control the proper
distance away from the vehicle traveling
ahead.
SSD0253
5-58 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
The following are conditions in which the
ICC system may be temporarily unavail-
able. In these instances, the ICC system
may not cancel and may not be able to
maintain the selected following distance
from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC sys-
tem is automatically canceled. A chime will
sound and the system will not be able to be
set:
∙ When the VDC system is turned off
∙ When the VDC or ABS operates
∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected
and your vehicle is traveling below the
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
∙ When the system judges the vehicle is
at a standstill
∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or L (Low) (if so equipped) position
∙ When the parking brake is applied
∙ When a wheel slips
LSD2574
Starting and driving 5-59
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. Turn the ICC
system back on to use the system.
Condition B
When the radar sensor area of the front
bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-
structed, the ICC system will automatically
be canceled. If the sensor area is covered
with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl
bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect
vehicles ahead. In these instances, the ICC
system may not cancel and may not be
able to maintain the selected following dis-
tance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to
check and clean the sensor area.
The system warning light (orange) will illu-
minate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar
Obstruction” warning message will appear
in the vehicle information display.
When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to
long walls), the system may illuminate the
system warning light (orange) and display
the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”
message.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, park
the vehicle in a safe location and turn the
engine off. Check to see if the radar sensor
window is blocked. If the radar sensor win-
dow is blocked, remove the blocking mate-
rial. Restart the engine. If the warning light
continues to illuminate, have the ICC sys-
tem checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C
When the ICC system is not operating
properly, a chime sounds and the system
warning light (orange) will come on.
Action to take
If the warning light comes on, park the ve-
hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,
restart the engine, resume driving and set
the ICC system again.
If it is not possible to set the system or
the indicator stays on, it may indicate
that the system is malfunctioning. Al-
though the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LSD2592 LSD2395
5-60 Starting and driving
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor for the ICC system
䊊
A
is located
on the front of the vehicle.
To keep the ICC system operating properly,
be sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the sensor area clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor. Do not touch or re-
move the screw located on the sensor.
Doing so could cause failure or mal-
function. If the sensor is damaged due
to an accident, it is recommended that
you contact a NISSAN dealer.
∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans-
parent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor.This could cause failure
or malfunction.
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restor-
ing the front bumper, it is recom-
mended that you contact a NISSAN
dealer.
Radio frequency statement
FCC Notice
For USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class A digi-
tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful in-
terference when the equipment is oper-
ated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radi-
ate radio frequency energy and, if not in-
stalled and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful in-
terference to radio communications. Op-
eration of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference
in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own ex-
pense.
Radio frequency radiation exposure infor-
mation:
This equipment complies with FCC radia-
tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
LSD2698
Starting and driving 5-61
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other an-
tenna or transmitter.
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the AEB
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid
to the driver. It is not a replacement
for the driver’s attention to traffic
conditions or responsibility to drive
safely. It cannot prevent accidents
due to carelessness or dangerous
driving techniques.
∙ The AEB system does not function in
all driving, traffic, weather and road
conditions.
The AEB system can assist the driver when
there is a risk of a forward collision with the
vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.
The AEB system uses a radar sensor
䊊
A
located behind the lower grille of the front
bumper to measure the distance to the
vehicle ahead in the same lane.
LSD2698
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB) (if so equipped)
5-62 Starting and driving
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. AEB system warning light
AEB SYSTEM OPERATION
The AEB system will function when your
vehicle is driven at speeds above approxi-
mately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected,
the AEB system will provide an initial warn-
ing to the driver by both a visual and au-
dible alert.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and
forcefully after the warning, and the AEB
system detects that there is still the possi-
bility of a forward collision, the system will
automatically increase the braking force. If
the driver does not take action, the AEB
system issues the second visual warning
(red) and audible warning and also applies
partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent,
the AEB system applies harder braking au-
tomatically.
LSD2570
Starting and driving 5-63
NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
braking is performed by the AEB system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance
to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and
roadway conditions, the system may help
the driver avoid a forward collision or may
help mitigate the consequences of a colli-
sion, should one be unavoidable. If the
driver is handling the steering wheel, accel-
erating or braking, the AEB system will
function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary to avoid a collision.
∙ When the accelerator pedal is de-
pressed.
∙ When there is no longer a vehicle de-
tected ahead.
If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,
the vehicle will remain at a standstill for
approximately 2 seconds before the
brakes are released.
LSD2573
5-64 Starting and driving
TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB
system ON or OFF.
1. Press the
button until “Settings”
displays in the vehicle information dis-
play. Use the
button to select
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-
TER button.
2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN-
TER button.
3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press
the ENTER button.
When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB
system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
The AEB system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.
AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the AEB system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
∙ The AEB system cannot detect all ve-
hicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensor does not detect the
following objects:
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles
in the roadway.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Crossing vehicles.
∙ The radar sensor has some perfor-
mance limitations. If a stationary ve-
hicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB
system will not function when the ve-
hicle is driven at speeds over approxi-
mately 50 mph (80 km/h).
∙
The radar sensor may not detect a ve-
hicle ahead in the following conditions:
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material
covering the radar sensor.
– Interference by other radar
sources.
– Snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles.
– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.,
motorcycle).
– When driving on a steep downhill
slope or roads with sharp curves.
∙
In some road or traffic conditions, the
AEB system may unexpectedly apply
partial braking. When acceleration is
necessary, continue to depress the ac-
celerator pedal to override the system.
∙ Braking distances increase on slip-
pery surfaces.
∙
The system is designed to automatically
check the sensor’s functionality, within
certain limitations. The system may not
detect some forms of obstructions of
the sensor area such as ice, snow, stick-
ers, etc. In these cases, the system may
not be able to warn the driver properly.
Be sure that you check, clean and clear
the sensor area regularly.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-65
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interfer-
ence from another radar source, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the AEB system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the sensor area of the front bumper
is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak-
ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,
the AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Ra-
dar Obstruction” warning message will ap-
pear in the vehicle information display.
When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to
long walls), the system may illuminate the
LSD2571
5-66 Starting and driving
AEB system warning light (orange) and dis-
play the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruc-
tion” message.
Action to take
If the AEB system warning light (orange)
comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place,
place the shift lever in the P (Park) position
and turn the engine off. Clean the radar
cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth,
and restart the engine. If the warning light
continues to illuminate, have the AEB sys-
tem checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, the AEB system warning light (or-
ange) will illuminate and the warning mes-
sage [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take
If the AEB system warning light (orange)
comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe loca-
tion, turn the engine off and restart the
engine. If the warning light continues to
illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor
䊊
A
is located on the front of the
vehicle.
To keep the system operating properly, be
sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.
∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or simi-
lar objects on the front bumper near
the sensor area. This could cause failure
or malfunction.
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restor-
ing the front bumper, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
FCC Notice
For USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications made to this
equipment not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
LSD2698
Starting and driving 5-67
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-
antes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil
doit accepter tout brouillage radioélec-
trique subi, même si le brouillage est sus-
ceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionne-
ment.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to ob-
tain maximum engine performance
and ensure the future reliability and
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may re-
sult in shortened engine life and re-
duced engine performance.
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-
stant speed, either fast or slow, and do
not run the engine over 4,000 RPM.
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
∙ Avoid quick starts.
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-
sible.
∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops
∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible
∙ Maintain constant speed while com-
muting and coast whenever possible
2. Maintain Constant Speed
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops
∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your num-
ber of stops
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-
mize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
5-68 Starting and driving
∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag
∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-
tances
∙ Observing the speed limit and not
exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where
legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-
ciency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag
∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces un-
necessary braking
∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes
∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions
5. Use Cruise Control
∙ Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady
speed
∙ Cruise control is particularly effective
in providing fuel savings when driving
on flat terrains
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save
time
7. Avoid Idling
∙ Shutting off your engine when safe
for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds
saves fuel and reduces emissions
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll
Roads
∙ Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruis-
ing speed through the toll and avoid
stopping and starting
9. Winter Warm Up
∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact
to fuel economy
∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to
effectively circulate the engine oil be-
fore driving
∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-
ating temperature more quickly
while driving versus idling
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever pos-
sible
∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C sys-
tem
11. ECO Mode
∙ The ECO mode helps to enhance the
fuel economy by controlling the en-
gine and Continuously Variable
Transmission (if so equipped) opera-
tion automatically to avoid rapid ac-
celeration.
Starting and driving 5-69
∙ Keep your engine tuned up.
∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.
∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, refer to
“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tions” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.
∙ Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed in P (Park) for
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models or in an appropriate
gear for manual transmission (M/T)
models. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or
roll away and result in an accident.
Make sure the shift lever has been
pushed as far forward as it can go and
cannot be moved without depressing
the foot brake pedal.
SSD0488
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
5-70 Starting and driving
∙ Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. M/T models
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)
position. When parking on an uphill
grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.
CVT models
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB
䊊
1
:
Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB
䊊
2
:
Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB
䊊
3
:
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power as-
sist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine run-
ning, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
The power steering system is designed to
provide power assist while driving to oper-
ate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated re-
peatedly or continuously while parking or
driving at a very low speed, the power as-
sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.
This is to prevent overheating of the power
steering system and protect it from getting
damaged. While the power assist is re-
duced, steering wheel operation will be-
come heavy. When the temperature of the
power steering system goes down, the
power assist level will return to normal.
Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-
POWER STEERING
Starting and driving 5-71
erations that could cause the power steer-
ing system to overheat.
You may hear a noise when the steering
wheel is operated quickly. However, this is
not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illumi-
nates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not
functioning properly and may need servic-
ing. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illu-
minates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering, but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
The brake system has two separate hy-
draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-
sure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and stopping distance will
be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-
celerating could cause the wheels to
skid and result in an accident.
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power as-
sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-
ing will be harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be lon-
ger and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.
BRAKE SYSTEM
5-72 Starting and driving
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,
in order to assure the best braking perfor-
mance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
it cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain ve-
hicle control during braking on slip-
pery surfaces. Remember that stop-
ping distances on slippery surfaces
will be longer than on normal sur-
faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain
a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you. Ultimately, the driver is
responsible for safety.
∙ Tire type and condition may also af-
fect braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Tire
and Loading Information label” in
the “Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
do not lock during hard braking or when
braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel
and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to
prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes
electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic
solenoids and a computer. The computer
has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests
the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in for-
ward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,
you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction. If the
computer senses a malfunction, it switches
the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning
light on the instrument panel. The brake sys-
tem then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
Starting and driving 5-73
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the ve-
hicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-
ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-
10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-
sure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-
tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise
from under the hood or feel a vibration
from the actuator when it is operating. This
is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-
erating properly. However, the pulsation
may indicate that road conditions are haz-
ardous and extra care is required while
driving.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even
with light pedal force.
WARNING
The brake assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.
The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC
system helps to perform the following
functions:
∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce
wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
so power is transferred to a non-
slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine
output to reduce drive wheel slip based
on vehicle speed (traction control func-
tion).
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-
low the steered path despite in-
creased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due
to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-
not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-
ing situations.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
5-74 Starting and driving
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes to
note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indi-
cates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip in-
dicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the
indicator light comes on in the
instrument panel. The VDC system auto-
matically turns off when the indicator light
is off.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
VDC system. The
indicator and the
AEB system warning light illuminates to in-
dicate the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to
prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
wheel. The
indicator flashes if this oc-
curs. All other VDC functions are off and
the
indicator will not flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to
on when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-
ture that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle for-
ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-
tion of a malfunction.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and al-
ways drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the
indi-
cator light may illuminate.
Starting and driving 5-75
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked cor-
ners, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator may
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate. Do not drive on these types
of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may illumi-
nate. This is not a malfunction. Re-
start the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator may
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP
The system gradually adjusts braking
power during normal braking to help pro-
vide an enhanced brake feel.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the front and rear wheels
depending on the radius of the turn.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and al-
ways drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the
indi-
cator light may illuminate.
5-76 Starting and driving
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked cor-
ners, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator may
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate. Do not drive on these types
of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator may flash or
the
indicator light may illumi-
nate. This is not a malfunction. Re-
start the engine after driving onto a
stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator may
flash or the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock
becomes frozen, heat the key before in-
serting it into the key hole, or use the re-
mote keyless entry key fob or the NISSAN
Intelligent Key®.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check the antifreeze to assure proper win-
ter protection. For additional information,
refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, refer to “Battery”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, in-
cluding the engine block. Refill before oper-
ating the vehicle. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially re-
duced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use
of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES
on all four wheels. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire
type, size, speed rating and availability
information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian prov-
inces prohibit their use. Check local,
state and provincial laws before install-
ing studded tires.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
Starting and driving 5-77
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, refer to “Tire chains” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-
move ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-
drifts.
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” un-
der these conditions. Try to avoid driv-
ing on wet ice until the road is salted
or sanded.
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or down-
shifting too fast, the drive wheels will
lose even more traction.
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
∙ Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on
the ice, and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so
equipped) on slippery roads.
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist
with cold temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)
or lower.
5-78 Starting and driving
WARNING
∙ Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be
seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least 10 A.
Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to
use the proper extension cord or a
grounded outlet can result in a fire or
electrical shock and cause serious
personal injury.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into
a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-
sion cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground
Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,
grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be
plugged in for at least2-4hours, de-
pending on outside temperatures, to
properly warm the engine coolant. Use
an appropriate timer to turn the engine
block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away
from moving parts.
Starting and driving 5-79
MEMO
5-80 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2
Emergency engine shut off
(Push-button ignition models only) ..............6-2
Flat tire ..........................................6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)........................................6-3
Changing a flat tire ...........................6-3
Jump starting ...................................6-9
Push starting ....................................6-11
If your vehicle overheats .........................6-11
Towing your vehicle ............................6-12
Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-12
Vehicle recovery
(freeing a stuck vehicle)......................6-14
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emer-
gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
∙
Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
∙ Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
of the hazard warning flasher switch
while driving.
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the follow-
ing procedure:
∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.
LIC0394
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
(Push-button ignition models only)
6-2 In case of emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-
tors tire pressure of all tires except the
spare. When the low tire pressure warning
light is lit, and the “CHECK TIRE PRES” (ve-
hicles without a vehicle information dis-
play) also appears in the trip computer or
the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” (vehicles
with a vehicle information display) appears
in the vehicle information display, one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with
low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and
warn you of it by the low tire pressure warn-
ing light. This system will activate only
when the vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights
and audible reminders” in the “Instruments
and controls” section, and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting
and driving” sections of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-
ing with under-inflated tires may per-
manently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label to turn the low tire pres-
sure warning light OFF. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.
∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMS
such as the spare tire, TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately one minute. The light will re-
main on after one minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
sure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
FLAT TIRE
In case of emergency 6-3
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Shift the manual trans-
mission into R (Reverse), or the CVT into
P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic
and to signal professional road assis-
tance personnel that you need assis-
tance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-
hicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-
curely applied and the manual trans-
mission is shifted into R (Reverse), or
the CVT is shifted into P (Park).
∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic
is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-
fessional road assistance.
A. Blocks
B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor car-
peting and spare tire cover
䊊
A
. Remove
the jack and the spare tire.
2. To remove the jack, take off the strap
and lift out. If necessary, remove the
spare tire first to easily access the jack
strap.
LCE2142 LCE2394
6-4 In case of emergency
3. Turn the clamp counterclockwise and
remove to release the spare tire.
Removing wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could
result in personal injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
䊊
1
as illustrated.
Apply cloth
䊊
2
between the wheel and jack
rod to prevent damaging the wheel and
wheel cover.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover
or wheel surface.
LCE2395 SCE0630
In case of emergency 6-5
Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire
WARNING
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
∙ Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
other vehicles. The jack is designed
for lifting only your vehicle during a
tire change.
∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
∙ Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the ve-
hicle to move.
CE1089
6-6 In case of emergency
Always refer to the illustrations for the cor-
rect placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following in-
structions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two
turns by turning counterclockwise with
the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove
the wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point as illustrated so the top
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the
jack-up point. Align the jack head be-
tween the two notches in the front or
the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of
the jack head between the notches as
shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod with both hands. Carefully
raise the vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Remove the wheel nuts and
then remove the tire.
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
,
䊊
E
)
until they are tight.
SCE0002 WCE0056
In case of emergency 6-7
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illus-
trated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
,
䊊
E
). Lower the
vehicle completely.
WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-
sure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information Label.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
tire pressure, the display of the tire pres-
sure information may show higher pres-
sure than the COLD tire pressure after
the vehicle has been driven more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
This is because the tire pressurizes as
the tire temperature rises. This does not
indicate a system malfunction.
5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.
6. Install the jack in its storage area and
tighten the jack strap.
7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk
floor carpeting over the damaged tire.
8. Close the trunk.
LCE2392
6-8 In case of emergency
WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can be-
come dangerous projectiles in an ac-
cident or sudden stop.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. Refer to specific instruc-
tions under the heading “Wheels and
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.
WARNING
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting
in severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with any-
thing, immediately flush the con-
tacted area with water.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-
tery, always wear suitable eye protec-
tors (for example, goggles or indus-
trial safety spectacles) and remove
rings, metal bands, or any other jew-
elry. Do not lean over the battery
when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
JUMP STARTING
In case of emergency 6-9
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause per-
sonal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another ve-
hicle, position the two vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to
touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmis-
sion) or to P (Park) (CVT). Switch off all
unnecessary electrical systems (lights,
heater, air conditioner (if so equipped),
etc.).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
4. Ensure the vent caps are level and
tight.
5. Connect the jumper cables in the se-
quence illustrated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
).
CAUTION
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi-
tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body
ground (for example, strut mounting
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
the battery.
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.
6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
7. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the
engine of the vehicle being jump
started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the ig-
nition switch in the OFF position and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
8. After starting the engine, carefully dis-
connect the negative cable and then
the positive cable.
LCE2223
6-10 In case of emergency
CAUTION
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models and Manual Transmis-
sion (M/T) cannot be push-started or
tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage
∙ For Manual Transmission (M/T) mod-
els, never try to start the vehicle by
towing it. When the engine starts, the
forward surge could cause the vehicle
to collide with the tow vehicle.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the
following steps.
WARNING
∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause en-
gine damage or a vehicle fire.
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while
the engine is still hot. When the radia-
tor cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-
ply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual trans-
mission) or to P (Park) (CVT).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so
equipped). Open all the windows, move
the heater or air conditioner tempera-
ture control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood. (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine.) Do not open the hood fur-
ther until no steam or coolant can be
seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage
or looseness. Also check if the cooling
fan is running. The radiator hoses and
radiator should not leak water. If cool-
ant is leaking, the water pump belt is
missing or loose, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine cool-
ing fan can start at any time.
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
In case of emergency 6-11
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant res-
ervoir with the engine running. Add
coolant to the engine coolant reservoir
if necessary. Have your vehicle re-
paired. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin-
cial in Canada) and local regulations for
towing must be followed. Incorrect towing
equipment could damage your vehicle.
Towing instructions are available from a
NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are
generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure
proper towing and to prevent accidental
damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom-
mends having a service operator tow your
vehicle. It is advisable to have the service
operator carefully read the following pre-
cautions:
WARNING
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condi-
tion. If any of these conditions apply,
dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For additional information, refer to “Flat
towing” in the “Technical and consumer in-
formation” section of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-
tional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
6-12 In case of emergency
2WD models with Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed
truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
∙ Never tow CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels
on the ground (forward or backward),
as this may cause serious and expen-
sive damage to the transmission. If it
is necessary to tow the vehicle with
the rear wheels raised always use
towing dollies under the front wheels.
∙ When towing CVT models with the
rear wheels on the ground or on tow-
ing dollies:
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by plac-
ing the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism (for
models with a steering lock
mechanism).
LCE2345
In case of emergency 6-13
2WD models with manual
transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illus-
trated.
If you must use a pull behind tow truck put
the manual transmission in N (Neutral).
Your vehicle speed should never exceed
60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your ve-
hicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle
the engine with the transmission in N (Neu-
tral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en-
gine after every 500 miles of towing may
cause damage to the transmission’s inter-
nal parts.
CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ If you have to tow manual transmis-
sion models with the rear wheels on
the ground (if you do not use towing
dollies) or four wheels on the ground:
– Always release the parking brake.
– Move the transmission shift lever
to the N (Neutral) position
– Observe the following restricted
towing speeds and distances for
manual transmission models only:
Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)
Distance: Less than 500 miles
(805 km)
When towing long distances or speeds in
excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the
propeller shaft before towing to prevent
damage to the transmission.For additional
information, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
sonal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
∙ Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
LCE2346
6-14 In case of emergency
∙ Tow chains or cables must be at-
tached only to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
tow or free a stuck vehicle.
∙ Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
∙ Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the ve-
hicle. Never pull at an angle.
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except
the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device de-
signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-
ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) System.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-
verse) and D (Drive) (Continuously
Variable Transmission models) or 1st
(Low) and R (Reverse) (manual trans-
mission models).
∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-
sible to maintain the rocking motion.
∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (Continuously Variable Trans-
mission models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (manual transmission
models).
∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-15
MEMO
6-16 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ................................7-2
Washing......................................7-2
Waxing .......................................7-2
Removing spots ..............................7-3
Underbody ...................................7-3
Glass .........................................7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) .......7-3
Chromeparts................................7-3
Tire dressings ................................7-3
Cleaning interior.................................7-4
Air fresheners ................................7-6
Floor mats (if so equipped) ...................7-6
Seatbelts.................................... 7-7
Corrosion protection ............................7-8
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion .............................7-8
Environmental factors influence the
rate of corrosion..............................7-8
Protect your vehicle from corrosion ..........7-9
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-
age from acid rain.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-
face.
Whenever possible, store or park your ve-
hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a
body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-
face when putting on or removing the
body cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-
ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, es-
pecially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle compo-
nents, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your car
wash to confirm that acid is not used.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical de-
tergents, gasoline or solvents.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.
∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-
fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Take care that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the door are open. Spray water
under the body and in the wheel wells to
loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the
vehicle to avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-
ered appearance before re-applying wax.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to assist you in choosing the proper
product.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
7-2 Appearance and care
∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions sup-
plied with the wax.
∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-
sives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive pol-
ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-
ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the surface of the paint to avoid last-
ing damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it
is necessary to clean the underbody regu-
larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspen-
sion. Before the winter period and again in
the spring, the underseal must be checked
and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-
mal for glass to become coated with a film
after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.
Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily
remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the win-
dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-
age the electrical conductors, radio an-
tenna elements or rear window de-
froster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-
cially during winter months in areas where
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as
ambient temperature.
∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after
the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-
ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-
plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-
ing and form a compound. This compound
may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
Appearance and care 7-3
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-
cult to remove).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufac-
turer.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-
faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifi-
cation sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and re-
sult in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar material.
∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to leather surfaces
and should be removed promptly. Do
not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-
ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents or ammonia-based clean-
ers as they may damage the leather’s
natural finish.
∙ Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.
CLEANING INTERIOR
7-4 Appearance and care
For Alcantara® (if so equipped)
Water Soluble Stains Stains Not Soluble in Water Resistant Stains
Stain Cleaning Method Stain Cleaning Method Repeat as Necessary Don’t Know What Caused the Stain?
Fruit juice, jam, jelly,
syrup, ketchup,
chocolate, ice cream
and mustard
Use a white towel
damped in lukewarm
water; rinse by dab-
bing with a damped
white towel in clean
water.
Makeup (Lipstick,
foundation, mascara,
eye shadow), perfume,
shoe polish, grease or
oil (in general), grass
stain
Rub with ethyl alcohol
(remember not to rub
too hard), wipe with
water and rinse by
dabbing with clean
water.
Repeat treatments as
often as necessary.
Even stains that are
not soluble in water
will often require to be
treated with water
afterwards.
Treat with lukewarm water first, then
rinse by dabbing with clean water. If
the stain begins to dissolve in the
water, repeat the treatment as often
as necessary. Allow to dry and if
necessary, treat with ethyl alcohol
Blood, eggs, excre-
ment or urine
Wipe with water at
room temperature,
rinse with clean water.
AVOID the use of
warm water because
it will make these sub-
stances coagulate.
Chewing gum
Put a plastic bag full of
ice on top of the gum,
when the gum has
become hard remove
the pieces, then treat
with ethyl alcohol.
Vinegar, tomato
sauce, coffee or hair
gel
Pre-treat with lemon
juice, then wipe with
lukewarm water, rinse
by dabbing with clean
water.
Appearance and care 7-5
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following precau-
tions:
∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place
the air freshener in a location that al-
lows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.
∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
on the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufactur-
er’s instructions before using the air fresh-
eners.
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-
other floor mat in the driver front po-
sition or install them upside down or
backwards.
∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-
cifically designed for use in your ve-
hicle model and model year.
∙ Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat position-
ing hook. For additional information,
refer to "Floor mat installation" in this
section.
∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-
terfere with pedal operation.
∙ Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.
∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular clean-
ing and replaced if they become exces-
sively worn.
LAI2009
7-6 Appearance and care
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-
sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of
the floor mat positioning hooks for each
seating position varies depending on the
vehicle.
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the
shift lever in P (Park) position (Continu-
ously Variable Transmission models) or
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
(manual transmission models) and
with the parking break fully applied, po-
sition the floor mat in the floorwell so
that the floor mat grommet holes are
aligned with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-
fere with pedal operation. With the igni-
tion still in the OFF position, the shift
lever in the P (Park) position (Continu-
ously Variable Transmission models) or
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position
(manual transmission models) and
with the parking break applied, fully ap-
ply and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal opera-
tion or prevent the pedal from return-
ing to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-
pletely in the shade before using them. For
additional information, refer to “Seat belt
maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.
Positioning hooks
LPD2495
Appearance and care 7-7
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may se-
verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
∙ The accumulation of moisture-
retaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those ar-
eas where the temperatures stay above
freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use accelerates the corrosion process.
Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-
tion of paint surfaces.
CORROSION PROTECTION
7-8 Appearance and care
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to
keep the vehicle clean.
∙ Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumula-
tion.
∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.
CAUTION
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or
broom.
∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic com-
ponents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
Appearance and care 7-9
MEMO
7-10 Appearance and care
8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions .......................8-2
Engine compartment check locations ...........8-3
Engine cooling system ..........................8-5
Checking engine coolant level ................8-6
Changing engine coolant.....................8-6
Engine oil........................................8-7
Checking engine oil level .....................8-7
Changing engine oil ..........................8-8
Changing engine oil filter ....................8-10
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid (if so equipped) .............................8-11
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ..........8-12
Brake fluid ...................................8-12
Clutch (if so equipped) fluid ..................8-12
Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-13
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir............8-13
Battery.........................................8-14
Jump starting ...............................8-15
Variable voltage control system ................8-16
Drive belt .......................................8-16
Spark plugs ....................................8-17
Replacing spark plugs .......................8-17
Air cleaner......................................8-18
In-cabin microfilter ..........................8-19
Windshield wiper blades ........................8-19
Cleaning ....................................8-19
Replacing ...................................8-19
Brakes..........................................8-21
Fuses...........................................8-22
Engine compartment .......................8-22
Passenger compartment....................8-24
Battery replacement ...........................8-25
Key fob (if so equipped) ......................8-26
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ......8-27
Lights ..........................................8-29
Headlights...................................8-29
Turn signal bulb .............................8-31
Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-31
Ex
terior and interior lights ...................8-33
Wheels and tires................................8-35
Tire pressure ................................8-35
Tire labeling .................................8-39
Types of tires ................................8-41
Tire chains ..................................8-42
Changing wheels and tires ..................8-43
When performing any inspection or main-
tenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-
lowing are general precautions which
should be closely observed.
WARNING
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the ve-
hicle from moving. For manual trans-
mission models, move the shift lever
to N (Neutral). For CVT models, move
the shift lever to P (Park).
∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when perform-
ing any parts replacement or repairs.
∙ If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans,
belts and any other moving parts.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jew-
elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-
fore working on your vehicle.
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
∙ If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-
gine models are under high pressure
even when the engine is off, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for service of the fuel filter or
fuel lines.
∙
Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come on
at any time without warning, even if the
ignition key is in the OFF position and the
engine is not running. To avoid injury, al-
ways disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.
CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
∙
Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
∙ Never leave the engine or the trans-
mission related component harness
connector disconnected while the ig-
nition switch is in the ON position.
∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-
tery or any transistorized component
while the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-
tions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
available. For additional information, refer
to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
8-2 Do-it-yourself
MRA8DE engine
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir
3. Air cleaner
4. Battery
5. Fuse and relay box
6. Engine coolant reservoir
7. Radiator cap
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Drive belt location
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
LDI2931
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
Do-it-yourself 8-3
MR16DDT engine
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)
fluid reservoir
3. Air cleaner
4. Battery
5. Fuse and relay box
6. Engine coolant reservoir
7. Radiator cap
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Drive belt location
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
11. Relay box (DTRL) (if so equipped)
LDI3011
8-4 Do-it-yourself
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant
protection. The antifreeze solution con-
tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-
tional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.
WARNING
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional informa-
tion on precautions, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
gine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
∙ Never use any cooling system addi-
tives such as radiator sealer. Additives
may clog the cooling system and
cause damage to the engine, trans-
mission and/or cooling system.
∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-
diluted to provide antifreeze protec-
tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
freeze protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your ve-
hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-
trate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
low the coolant manufacturer’s in-
structions to maintain minimum anti-
freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solu-
tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.
∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),
including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
ant. For additional information, refer
to the “Maintenance and schedules”
section of this manual.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Do-it-yourself 8-5
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level
䊊
B
, add coolant
to the MAX level
䊊
A
. If the reservoir is empty,
check the coolant level in the radiator
when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-
cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX
level
䊊
A
.
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-
pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing
any other type of coolant or the use of
non-distilled water will reduce the life ex-
pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-
ditional information, refer to the “Mainte-
nance and schedules” section of this
manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-
gine compartment check locations” in this
section.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine over-
heating.
WARNING
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
∙ Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the en-
gine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escap-
ing from the radiator.
∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
MRA8DE
LDI2167
MR16DDT
LDI3060
8-6 Do-it-yourself
Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-
erly. Check your local regulations.
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
10 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
MRA8DE
LDI2168
MR16DDT
LDI3039
ENGINE OIL
Do-it-yourself 8-7
5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
(High) and L (Low) marks
䊊
B
. This is the
normal operating oil level range. If the
oil level is below the L (Low) mark
䊊
A
,
remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-
ommended oil through the opening.
Do not overfill
䊊
C
.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the sever-
ity of operating conditions.
CAUTION
∙ Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the
engine, and such damage is not cov-
ered by warranty.
∙ It is normal to add some oil between
oil maintenance intervals or during
the break-in period, depending on the
severity of operating conditions.
Make sure to follow the engine oil changing
intervals in the maintenance booklet. Op-
erating under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil change:
∙ repeated short distance driving
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ stop and go commuting.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
LDI0371
MRA8DE
LDI3041
8-8 Do-it-yourself
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
turn it off.
3. Remove the oil filler cap
䊊
A
by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain
plug
䊊
B
.
5. Remove the drain plug
䊊
B
with a
wrench by turning it counterclockwise
and completely drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Changing
engine oil filter” in this section.
WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
∙ Be careful not to burn yourself. The
engine oil may be hot.
∙ Waste oil must be disposed of
properly.
∙ Check your local regulations.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain
plug with a wrench. Do not use exces-
sive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, then install
the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information on the drain
and refill capacity, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-
ties” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends
on the oil temperature and drain time.
Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to deter-
mine when the proper amount of oil is
in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
around the drain plug and oil filter. Cor-
rect as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
MR16DDT
LDI3043
Do-it-yourself 8-9
For additional information on the location
of the engine oil filler cap, refer to “Engine
compartment check locations” in this sec-
tion.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil
filter
䊊
B
.
MRA8DE
LDI3045
MR16DDT
LDI3044
8-10 Do-it-yourself
4. Loosen the oil filter
䊊
B
with an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise.
Then remove the oil filter by turning it
by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-
gine oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-
rial remaining on the sealing surface of
the engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
7. Screw on the oil filter. Securely tighten
oil filter with wrench. Do not use exces-
sive force.
Oil filter tightening torque:
18 N·m (13 ft-lb)
8. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening
䊊
A
, then
install oil filler cap securely.
9. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
10. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-
gine oil if necessary.
For additional information on the location
of the engine oil filler cap, refer to “Engine
compartment check locations” in this sec-
tion.
CAUTION
∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)
ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with
other fluids.
∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-
age the CVT. Damage caused by the
use of fluids other than as recom-
mended is not covered under
NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may
also damage the CVT. Damage caused
by the use of fluids other than as rec-
ommended is not covered under
NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid
is required,it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so
equipped)
Do-it-yourself 8-11
For additional brake and clutch fluid speci-
fication information, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and
clutch (if so equipped) systems. The
use of improper fluids can damage
the brake and clutch system and af-
fect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
∙ Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous
and should be stored carefully in
marked containers out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
BRAKE FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
level is below the MIN line
䊊
1
, or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine
NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
fluid up to the MAX line
䊊
2
. If fluid must be
added frequently, the system should be
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
level is below the MIN line
䊊
1
, or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine
NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
fluid up to the MAX line
䊊
2
. If fluid must be
added frequently, the system should be
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LDI2169 LDI2169
BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
8-12 Do-it-yourself
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir
periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid
when the low windshield-washer fluid
warning light (if so equipped) comes on or
the “Low Washer Fluid” warning message (if
so equipped) shows on the vehicle infor-
mation display.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a
windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the mix-
ture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Anti-freeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the
paint.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s rec-
ommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir. Do not use the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir to mix the
washer fluid concentrate and water.
LDI2170
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Do-it-yourself 8-13
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of bak-
ing soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for
30 days or longer, disconnect the nega-
tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent
discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,
an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-
drogen gas generated by the battery
is explosive. Explosive gases can
cause blindness or injury. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-
furic acid can cause blindness or in-
jury. After touching a battery or bat-
tery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
clothing, immediately flush with wa-
ter for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid
in the battery is low. Low battery fluid
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
∙ When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.
∙ Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
BATTERY
8-14 Do-it-yourself
1. Remove the vent caps with a screw-
driver as shown. Use a cloth to protect
the battery case.
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only dis-
tilled water to bring the level up to the
bottom of the filler opening. Do not
overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-
tion of this manual. If the engine does not
start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
WDI0224
WDI0529
Do-it-yourself 8-15
CAUTION
∙ Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-
pass the variable voltage control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable
voltage control system. This system mea-
sures the amount of electrical discharge
from the battery and controls voltage gen-
erated by the generator.
The current sensor
䊊
A
is located near the
battery along the negative battery cable. If
you add electrical accessories to your ve-
hicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable
body ground such as the frame or engine
block area.
1. Automatic tensioner pulley
2. Generator pulley
3. Water pump pulley
4. Air conditioner compressor pulley
(if so equipped/Idler pulley (if so
equipped)
5. Crankshaft pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position before servicing drive
belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
LDI2178 WDI0638
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
DRIVE BELT
8-16 Do-it-yourself
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-
usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is
in poor condition, have it replaced or
adjusted. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
(except California models)
It is not necessary to replace platinum-
tipped
䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the “Maintenance and sched-
ules” section of this manual. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
(MR16DDT engine or California
models only)
It is not necessary to replace iridium-
tipped
䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the “Maintenance and sched-
ules” section in the manual. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
SDI1895
SPARK PLUGS
Do-it-yourself 8-17
∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned
and reused. Replace it according to the
maintenance log shown in the “Mainte-
nance and schedules” section of this
manual.
To remove the air cleaner filter:
1. Unlatch the retaining clips
䊊
A
.
2. Pull up at points
䊊
B
and remove.
3. Pull up and remove air cleaner housing
䊊
C
.
4. Remove the air cleaner filter. Wipe the
inside of the air cleaner filter housing
and the cover with a damp cloth, then
replace air cleaner filter.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
housing and latch the clips.
WARNING
∙ Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops the
flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t
there, and the engine backfires, you
could be burned. Do not drive with the
air cleaner removed, and be careful
when working on the engine with the
air cleaner removed.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
could result in serious injury.
LDI2171
AIR CLEANER
8-18 Do-it-yourself
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry
of airborne dust and pollen particles and
reduces some objectionable outside
odors. The filter is located behind the glove
box. For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual for change intervals.
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other mate-
rial may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer fluid or a mild detergent.Your wind-
shield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer fluid or a mild deter-
gent. Then rinse the blades with clear wa-
ter. If your windshield is still not clear after
cleaning the blades and using the wiper,
install new windshield wiper blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol-
low the procedure below:
1. When ignition switch is ON or within
60 seconds after placing the ignition
switch from the ON to OFF position,
place the windshield wiper and washer
lever into the OFF position.
2. Rapidly lift the windshield wiper and
washer lever
䊊
A
upwards twice within
0.5 seconds. This action will cause the
wipers to automatically take the ser-
vice position.
LDI2721
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Do-it-yourself 8-19
3. Once the wipers are in the service po-
sition, push the release tab
䊊
B
.
4. Move the wiper blade down
䊊
C
and re-
move.
5. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place.
6. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is
in the groove.
7. Finally, lift the windshield wiper and
washer lever to the mist position
䊊
D
once and release. This action will cause
the wipers to resume the set position.
CAUTION
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened.
∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.
LDI2475 LDI2722
8-20 Do-it-yourself
If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-
ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
䊊
F
. This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
small pin
䊊
E
.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front (and rear-if so equipped) disc-
type brakes self-adjust every time the
brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type
brakes (if so equipped) self-adjust every
time the parking brake is applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is nor-
mal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information re-
garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-
propriate maintenance schedule informa-
tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.
LDI2723
BRAKES
Do-it-yourself 8-21
Two types of fuses are used. Type
䊊
A
is
used in the fuse boxes in the engine com-
partment. Type
䊊
B
is used in the passenger
compartment fuse box.
Type
䊊
A
fuses can be installed in the engine
compartment and passenger compart-
ment fuse boxes.
If a type
䊊
A
fuse is used to replace a type
䊊
B
fuse, the type
䊊
A
fuse will not be level with
the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration.
This will not affect the performance of the
fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the
fuse box securely.
Type
䊊
B
fuses cannot be installed in the
under hood fuse boxes. Only use type
䊊
A
fuses in the under hood fuse boxes.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
all fuses listed on the fuse label.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-
perage rating than that specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or electronic control
units or cause a fire.
LDI0455 LDI0457 LDI2172
FUSES
8-22 Do-it-yourself
If any electrical equipment does not come
on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing
the tab
䊊
A
and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller,
which is located in the center of the
fuse block in the passenger compart-
ment.
5. If the fuse is open
䊊
B
, replace it with a
new fuse
䊊
C
.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-
trical system checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
all fuses listed on the fuse label.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not oper-
ate and fuses are in good condition, check
the fusible links. If any of these fusible links
are melted, replace with only Genuine
NISSAN parts.
LDI2746
Do-it-yourself 8-23
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-
perage rating than that specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or electronic control
units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover
䊊
A
with a
suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam-
aging the trim.
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be re-
placed.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
䊊
B
.
5. If the fuse is open
䊊
C
, replace it with an
equivalent good fuse
䊊
D
.
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
all fuses listed on the fuse label.
LDI2712 LDI2713
8-24 Do-it-yourself
Extended storage switch
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, remove the extended storage switch
and check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-
tended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.
How to replace the extended storage
switch:
1. To remove the extended storage
switch, be sure the ignition switch is in
the OFF or LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the
OFF position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs
䊊
A
and
䊊
B
found
on each side of the storage switch.
5. Pull the storage switch straight out
from the fuse box
䊊
C
.
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swal-
low the battery or removed parts.
LDI2747
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Do-it-yourself 8-25
KEY FOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the key fob as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the screw
䊊
A
.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of
the corner
䊊
B
and twist it to separate
the upper part from the lower part. Use
a cloth to protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the case
䊊
C
.
Recommended battery: CR1620 or equiva-
lent.
4. Close the lid and install the screw se-
curely.
5. Operate the buttons to check its op-
eration.
If you need assistance with replacement, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
∙ An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always con-
firm local regulations for battery dis-
posal.
∙ The key fob is water-resistant; how-
ever, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
∙ The operational range of the key fob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
LDI2219
8-26 Do-it-yourself
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This devise complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so
equipped)
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver
䊊
A
into the slit
䊊
B
of the corner and twist it
to separate the upper part from the
lower part. Place a cloth over the
screwdriver to protect the casing.
LDI2001
Do-it-yourself 8-27
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or
equivalent.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold-
ing the battery across the contact
points will seriously deplete the stor-
age capacity.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
䊊
C
and
䊊
D
.
5. Operate the buttons to check the op-
eration.
If you need assistance with replacement, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
LDI2637
8-28 Do-it-yourself
HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions
outlined in this section.
Replacing the halogen headlight
bulb (if so equipped)
NOTE:
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which used a replaceable headlight (halo-
gen) bulb. They can be replaced from in-
side the engine compartment without re-
moving the headlight assembly.
CAUTION
∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac-
ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment
is necessary, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a
long period of time. Dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. entering the headlight
body may affect bulb performance.
Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly just before a replacement
bulb is installed.
Type A (if so equipped)
LDI2980
LIGHTS
Do-it-yourself 8-29
∙ Only touch the base when handling
the bulb. Never touch the glass enve-
lope. Touching the glass could signifi-
cantly affect bulb life and/or head-
light performance.
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
1. Rotate the (high beam) cover
䊊
A
coun-
terclockwise to access the (high beam)
bulb socket
䊊
C
. Rotate the bulb socket
䊊
C
counterclockwise and remove bulb.
2. Rotate the (low beam) cover
䊊
B
(if so
equipped) counterclockwise to access
the (low beam) bulb socket
䊊
D
(if so
equipped). Rotate the bulb socket
䊊
D
(if
so equipped) counterclockwise and re-
move bulb.
3. Rotate the side marker bulb socket
䊊
E
counterclockwise and remove bulb.
4. Rotate the turn signal bulb socket
䊊
F
counterclockwise and remove bulb
䊊
G
.
Reverse instructions to install bulbs and
replace fender protector.
WARNING
Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit
or right after being turned off. Burning
may result.
CAUTION
• Do not touch glass surface of the bulb
with bare hands or allow oil or grease to
get on it to prevent damage to bulb.
• Do not leave the bulb out of the lamp
reflector for a long time because dust,
moisture, smoke, etc. may affect the
performance of the lamp.
• Fog may temporarily form inside the
lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in
a car wash. A temperature difference
between the inside and the outside of
the lens causes the fog. This is not a
malfunction. If large drops of water col-
lect inside the lens, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
Type B (if so equipped)
LDI2981
8-30 Do-it-yourself
Replacing the LED headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-
quired, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
TURN SIGNAL BULB
To replace the turn signal bulb follow the
instructions listed in the “Replacing the
halogen headlight bulb” found in this sec-
tion.
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions out-
lined in this section.
LDI2935
Do-it-yourself 8-31
Replacing the fog light bulb
CAUTION
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.
∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog
light for a long period of time as dust,
moisture and smoke may enter the
fog light body and affect the perfor-
mance of the fog light.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Access to the fog light is in front of and
behind the front tire and the fascia.
3. Remove the fasteners
䊊
A
; carefully pull
back the front fender protector.
4. Rotate the bulb
䊊
B
counterclockwise
and pull out to remove.
5. Remove by pulling straight off the fog
light. Do not shake or rotate the bulb
when removing it.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
8-32 Do-it-yourself
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)
Low/Daytime running (Canada only) 55 H11
High 65 H9
Turn/Park 27/7 3157 AK
Side marker 5 W5W
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)
Low/Daytime running (Canada only) — —
High** 65/— H9/—
Turn/Park 27/7 3157 AK
Park — —
Side marker 5 W5W
Daytime running lights (NISMO models only) — —
Front fog light (if so equipped) 55 H11
Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* — —
Map lights* — —
Room light 8 —
Trunk light* 3.4 158
High-mounted stop light*
Inside (if so equipped) — —
Spoiler (if so equipped) — —
Rear combination light*
Turn 21 WY21W
Tail — —
Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W
Backup (reversing) 16 W16W
Side marker — —
License plate light* 5 W5W
Always check with the Parts Department at
a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts infor-
mation.
* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for replacement.
** Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so
equipped) uses the projector LED and the
H9 bulb for the high beam function.
Do-it-yourself 8-33
1. Map light
2. Room light
3. Door mirror turn signal light (if so
equipped)
4. Headlight assembly
5. Fog light (if so equipped)/ Daytime
running light (NISMO models only)
6. High-mount stop light (inside)(if so
equipped)
7. Trunk light
8. High-mount stop light (spoiler)(if so
equipped)
9. License plate light
10. Rear combination light
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
LDI3137
WDI0263
8-34 Do-it-yourself
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely af-
fect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medi-
cal equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all tires
except the spare. When the low tire
pressure warning light is lit and the
CHECK TIRE PRES (vehicles without a
vehicle information display) warning
is displayed in the odometer, or the
“Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” (ve-
hicles with a vehicle information dis-
play) appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display, one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in
the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including
the spare) often and always prior to
long distance trips. The recom-
mended tire pressure specifications
are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label or the Tire and
Loading Information label under the
“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is af-
fixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire pressures should be checked
regularly because:
∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other ob-
jects or if the vehicle strikes a
curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold. The
tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert (if
so equipped) provides visual and au-
dible signals outside the vehicle for
inflating tires to the recommended
COLD tire pressure. For additional in-
formation, refer to “TPMS with Easy-
Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
WHEELS AND TIRES
Do-it-yourself 8-35
Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely af-
fect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an
accident.
∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label. The vehicle weight
capacity is indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating condi-
tions due to premature tire fail-
ure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Load-
ing beyond the specified capac-
ity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
∙ Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
∙ For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
8-36
Do-it-yourself
Tire and Loading Information
label
䊊
1
Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can
be seated in the vehicle.
䊊
2
Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve-
hicle loading information” in the
“Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
䊊
3
Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory.
䊊
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are consid-
ered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
at moderate speeds. The rec-
ommended cold tire inflation is
set by the manufacturer to pro-
vide the best balance of tire
wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-
ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
䊊
5
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
䊊
6
Spare tire size.
LDI2007
Do-it-yourself 8-37
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge
squarely onto the valve stem. Do
not press too hard or force the
valve stem sideways, or air will
escape. If the hissing sound of air
escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, re-
position the gauge to eliminate
this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the
core of the valve stem briefly
with the tip of the gauge stem to
release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air
as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.
Grades: NISMO
Size Cold Tire Infla-
tion Pressure
Front Original
Tire:
215/45ZR18
230 kPa, 33 PSI
Grades: NISMO
Rear Original
Tire:
215/45ZR18
230 kPa, 33 PSI
Spare Tire:
T125/70D16
420 kPa, 60 PSI
Grades: S, SV, SR, SL
Size Cold Tire Infla-
tion Pressure
Front Original
Tire:
205/50R17
P205/55R16
230 kPa, 33 PSI
Rear Original
Tire:
205/50R17
P205/55R16
230 kPa, 33 PSI
Spare Tire:
T125/70D16
420 kPa, 60 PSI
LDI0393
8-38 Do-it-yourself
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufac-
turers to place standardized infor-
mation on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and de-
scribes the fundamental character-
istics of the tire and also provides the
tire identification number (TIN) for
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
䊊
1
Tire size (example: P215/65R15
95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles
(not all tires have this informa-
tion).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in milli-
meters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This
number, known as the aspect
ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This num-
ber is the wheel or rim diameter
in inches.
Example
WDI0394
Example
WDI0395
Do-it-yourself 8-39
6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load in-
dex. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can sup-
port. You may not find this infor-
mation on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
䊊
2
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-
partment Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed
above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
Example
LDI2786
8-40 Do-it-yourself
䊊
3
Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which in-
clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth-
ers.
䊊
4
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
䊊
5
Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maxi-
mum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-
ways use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
䊊
6
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
䊊
7
The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
䊊
8
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that
are defined throughout this section,
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particu-
lar side that must always face out-
ward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
∙ When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the low tire
pressure warning system.
Do-it-yourself 8-41
∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to
do so may result in a circumference
difference between tires on the front
and rear axles which can cause the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
to malfunction resulting in personal
injury or death, excessive tire wear
and may damage the transmission
and differential gears.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All Season tires and may be more appropri-
ate in some areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the
use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rat-
ing to the original equipment tires. If you do
not, it can adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-
ings than factory equipped tires and may
not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed
rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, stud-
ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tires. Skid
and traction capabilities of studded snow
tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be in-
stalled on 205/50R17 and 215/45ZR18
size tires. Installation of the tire
chains/cables on 205/50R17 and
215/45ZR18 size tires will cause damage
to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire
chains/cables, you should install
205/55R16 size tires on your vehicle.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-
cording to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing
tire chains, make sure they are the proper
size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the chain manufac-
turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”
chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-
hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-
ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
8-42 Do-it-yourself
are designed to meet the minimum clear-
ances between the tire and the closest ve-
hicle suspension or body component re-
quired to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are de-
termined using the factory equipped tires.
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use
chain tensioners when recommended by
the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the
tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
For additional information on tire re-
placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”
in the “In case of emergency” section
of this manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts
be tightened to specification at
each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
∙ After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
∙ Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
∙ For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
WDI0258
Do-it-yourself 8-43
Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
∙ Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
∙ Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious per-
sonal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carry-
ing capacity as originally equipped. Rec-
ommended types and sizes are shown in
“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ The use of tires other than those rec-
ommended or the mixed use of tires
of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
patterns can adversely affect the ride,
braking, handling, VDC system,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, tire chain clearance, speedom-
eter calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could re-
sult in serious personal injury.
WDI0259
8-44 Do-it-yourself
∙ If your vehicle was originally
equipped with four tires that were the
same size and you are only replacing
two of the four tires, install the new
tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires
on the front axle may cause loss of
vehicle control in some driving condi-
tions and cause an accident and per-
sonal injury.
∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimen-
sion. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear, de-
grade vehicle handling characteris-
tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-
terference with the brake discs. Such
interference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad/shoe wear. For additional infor-
mation on wheel-off set dimensions,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash for ap-
proximately one minute. The light will
remain on after one minute. Have
your tires replaced and/or TPMS sys-
tem reset as soon as possible. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. Con-
tact a NISSAN dealer for ID
registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.
∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could
have structural damage and could fail
without warning.
∙ The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-
formation” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Do-it-yourself 8-45
Care of wheels
∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-
hicle to maintain their appearance.
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside
of the vehicle is washed.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
bead.
∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not
function.
Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be
damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
∙ The spare tire should be used for
emergency use only. It should be re-
placed with the standard tire at the
first opportunity to avoid possible tire
or differential damage.
∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels).
∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
∙ Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause
damage to the vehicle.
∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
8-46 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements......................9-2
General maintenance ........................9-2
Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2
Where to go for service .......................9-2
General maintenance ...........................9-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items.........................................9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5
Emission Control System Maintenance:.......9-5
Chassis and Body Maintenance: ..............9-6
Maintenance schedules .........................9-7
Additional Maintenance Items for
severe operating conditions ..................9-7
Standard maintenance..........................9-8
Emission control system maintenance .......9-8
Chassis & body maintenance.................9-11
Maintenance under severe operating
conditions......................................9-13
Severe driving conditions....................9-13
Maintenance log ...............................9-14
Some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your vehicle
good mechanical condition, as well as its
emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in
the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-
sponsibility to perform these procedures
regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you
prefer, a NISSAN dealer.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this sec-
tion are required to be serviced at regular
intervals. However under severe driving
conditions, additional or more frequent
maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-
cialists and are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through techni-
cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-
grams. They are completely qualified to
work on NISSAN vehicles before work be-
gins.
You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-
er’s service department can perform the
service needed to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle.
During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
check for the cause or have it checked
promptly. In addition, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or mainte-
nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-
nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
Doors and engine hood: Check that the
doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers
and links if necessary. Make sure that the
secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is re-
leased.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrica-
tion frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
lights are all operating properly and in-
stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-
ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are
missing, and check for any loose wheel
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-
ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all
tires, including the spare, to the pressure
specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts
or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the
TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core
and cap when the tires are replaced due to
wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-
hicle should pull to either side while driving
on a straight and level road, or if you detect
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-
ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-
way speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at least
every six months for cracks or other dam-
age. Have a damaged windshield repaired
by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-
diately. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism (if so
equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that
the vehicle is held securely with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position without apply-
ing any brakes.
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
the parking brake applied. If the parking
brake needs adjustment, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
ensure they operate smoothly and all
latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints/headrests
move up and down smoothly and the locks
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly
and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,
wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free
play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
that the wipers and washer operate prop-
erly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* (for serviceable batteries):
Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid
should be at the bottom of the filler open-
ing. Vehicles operated in high tempera-
tures or under severe conditions require
frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid
level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch
fluid levels are between the MIN and MAX
lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt
is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level surface with
the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-
ately have the exhaust system inspected. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-
oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if
fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause
and have it corrected immediately.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-
mation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control dust. It
is very important to remove these sub-
stances from the underbody, otherwise
rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and exhaust system. At the end of
winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those
areas where mud and dirt may have accu-
mulated. For additional information, refer
to the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The following descriptions are provided to
give you a better understanding of the
scheduled maintenance items that should
be regularly checked or replaced. The
maintenance schedule indicates at which
mileage/time intervals each item requires
service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance,
your vehicle requires that some items be
checked during normal day-to-day opera-
tion. For additional information, refer to
“General maintenance” in this section.
Items marked with “*” are recommended
by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform mainte-
nance on these items in order to maintain
the warranties which come with your
NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-
tervals are required.
When applicable, additional information
can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of
non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-
ing systems and strongly advises
against performing these services on a
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-
ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-
proved chemicals or solvents, the use of
which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-
ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-
formation” section of this manual.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper
tension. Replace any damaged drive belt.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-
vals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Maintenance and schedules 9-5
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replac-
ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For
additional information on the proper mix-
ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant
or the use of non-distilled water may re-
duce the recommended service interval
of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if
valve noise increases. Adjust valve clear-
ance if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor
lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose-
ness. Tighten connections or replace parts
as necessary.
Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not re-
quired. (in-tank type filter)
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or
deterioration. Tighten connections or re-
place parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the type as originally
equipped.
CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing,
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:
Check for wear, deterioration and fluid
leaks. Replace any deteriorated or dam-
aged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-
haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified
intervals. When driving for prolonged peri-
ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter
more frequently.
Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check
for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in-
structions under “General maintenance” in
this section. When rotating tires, check for
damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec-
essary.
Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for
signs of leakage at specified intervals. If
using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough
or muddy roads:
∙ Replace the manual transaxle gear oil
every 20,000 miles or 24 months.
∙ Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to in-
spect the fluid deterioration data using
a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is
more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid.
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-
cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-
nance schedules that may be used, de-
pending upon the conditions in which you
usually drive. These schedules contain
both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For
most people, the odometer reading will in-
dicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be
serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be per-
formed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Addi-
tional maintenance items should be per-
formed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-
tures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-
and-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-
ing for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
The following tables show the standard
maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions,
varying road surfaces, individual driving
habits and vehicle usage, additional or
more frequent maintenance may be re-
quired. After 120,000 miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
interval.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
15
(24)
18
20
(32)
24
25
(40)
30
30
(48)
36
35
(56)
42
40
(64)
48
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
55
(88)
66
60
(96)
72
Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR
Spark plugs (Iridium/Platinum - tipped
type)
See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (7)
STANDARD MAINTENANCE
9-8 Maintenance and schedules
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
75
(120)
90
80
(128)
96
85
(136)
102
90
(144)
108
95
(152)
114
100
(160)
120
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
115
(184)
138
120
(192)
144
Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR
Spark plugs (Iridium/Platinum - tipped
type)
See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (7)
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belt if
found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy
of the factory fill coolant.
(6) For MRA8DE:
Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even within specified periodic replacement mileage.
For MR16DDT:
Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.045 in (1.15 mm) even within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and
intervals are required.
9-10 Maintenance and schedules
CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
15
(24)
18
20
(32)
24
25
(40)
30
30
(48)
36
35
(56)
42
40
(64)
48
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
55
(88)
66
60
(96)
72
Brakelinesandcables IIIIII
Brake pads, rotors, drum and linings 夝 IIIIII
Brake fluid 夝 RRR
CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII
Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts 夝
III
Tire rotation See NOTE (3)
Front drive shaft boots 夝 IIIIII
Exhaust system 夝 III
In-cabin microfilter RRRR
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R
Maintenance and schedules 9-11
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
75
(120)
90
80
(128)
96
85
(136)
102
90
(144)
108
95
(152)
114
100
(160)
120
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
115
(184)
138
120
(192)
144
Brakelinesandcables IIIIII
Brake pads, rotors, drum and linings 夝 IIIIII
Brake fluid 夝 RRR
CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII
Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts 夝
III
Tire rotation See NOTE (3)
Front drive shaft boots 夝 IIIIII
Exhaust system 夝 III
In-cabin microfilter RRRR
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R
NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km),
then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
(2) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or
24 months.
(3) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.
9-12 Maintenance and schedules
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under
severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-
tures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-
and-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-
ing for long distance, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval
Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Brake pads, rotors, drum and lining Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Front drive shaft boots Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
Maintenance and schedules 9-13
5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
MAINTENANCE LOG
9-14 Maintenance and schedules
50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
Maintenance and schedules 9-15
95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
9-16
Maintenance and schedules
10 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities ......................................10-2
Fuel recommendation.......................10-4
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations ..........................10-7
Air conditioner system (if so equipped)
refrigerant and oil recommendations........10-8
Specifications ..................................10-9
Engine ......................................10-9
Wheels and tires............................10-10
Dimensions and weights ...................10-10
When traveling or registering in another
country.........................................10-11
Vehicle identification ...........................10-11
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate ........................................10-11
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) ............................10-11
Engine serial number.......................10-12
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........10-12
Emission control information label ......... 10-12
Tire and Loading Information label ......... 10-13
Air conditioner specification label
(if so equipped) ............................. 10-13
Installing front license plate.................... 10-13
Vehicle loading information ...................10-14
Terms ......................................10-14
Vehicle load capacity .......................10-15
Loading tips ................................ 10-17
Measurement of weights ................... 10-17
Towing a trailer ................................10-18
Flat towing .................................10-18
Uniform tire quality grading....................10-18
Emission control system warranty.............10-19
Reporting safety defects ......................10-20
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test............................................10-21
Event Data Recorders (EDR)....................10-21
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information ...................................10-22
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Fuel 50 L 13-1/4 gal 11 gal
• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in
this section.
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1 For additional
information, refer to
“Engine oil” in the
“Do-it-yourself” sec-
tion of this manual.
MRA8DE
With oil filter
change
4.0 L 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent mo-
tor oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommen-
dations” in this section.
Without oil
filter change
3.7 L 4 qt 3-1/4 qt
MR16DDT
With oil filter
change
4.4 L 4-5/8 qt 3-7/8 qt
Without oil
filter change
4.1 L 4-3/8 qt 3-5/8 qt
Engine coolant
with reservoir
MRA8DE 6.6 L 1-3/4 gal 1-1/2 gal
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) or equivalent.
MR16DDT
With manual
transmis-
sion
8.5 L 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal
With con-
tinuously
variable
transmis-
sion
8.7 L 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal
Manual transmission fluid — — —
• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type
75W-80, or equivalent.
• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR
Type is not available, API GL-4+, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be
used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine
NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type as soon as
it is available.
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
10-2 Technical and consumer information
Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — —
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3.
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
(or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other
fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN
CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the
use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under
NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid — — — • Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —
• HFC-134a (R-134a)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system (if
so equipped) refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this
section.
Air conditioning system oil — — —
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system (if
so equipped) refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this
section.
Windshield-washer fluid 4.8 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze fluid or equivalent
Technical and consumer information 10-3
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
MRA8DE
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
MR16DDT
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of
at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number
(Research octane number 96). If unleaded
premium gasoline is not available, you may
use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI number (re-
search octane number 91), but you may
notice a decrease in performance.
CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85.Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and sys-
tems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-
tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and ve-
hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-
ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-
tent, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-
lated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
specifications where it is available. Many of
the automobile manufacturers developed
this specification to improve emission con-
trol system and vehicle performance. Ask
your service station manager if the gaso-
line meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-
formulated gasolines. These gasolines are
specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-
sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
cleaner air and suggests that you use re-
formulated gasoline when available.
10-4 Technical and consumer information
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-
ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
fuels of which the oxygenate content and
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-
not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 15% oxygenate.
∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-
erly formulated with appropriate co-
solvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause fuel
system damage and/or vehicle per-
formance problems. At this time, suf-
ficient data is not available to ensure
that all methanol blends are suitable
for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-
rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during re-
fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.
E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-
tions require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percent-
age for that region.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-
hicle. U.S. government regulations require
fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or the
appropriate percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-
nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-
ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
adversely affect vehicle performance, in-
cluding the emissions control system. Note
that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more de-
tails.
Technical and consumer information 10-5
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-
ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane
booster, intake valve deposit removers,
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy
spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recom-
mended that you have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consump-
tion or engine damage. If any of the above
symptoms are encountered, have your ve-
hicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
10-6 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance.
For additional information, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in this section. NISSAN recommends the
use of an energy conserving oil in order to
improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-
cation or International Lubricant Standard-
ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
viscosity based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-
ity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals.”
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Using en-
gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-
fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil
and filter change intervals could reduce
engine life. Damage to the engine caused
by improper maintenance or use of incor-
LTI2051
Technical and consumer information 10-7
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recom-
mended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ extensive idling
∙ stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM (if so
equipped) REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type S (DH-PS) or
the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
may cause severe damage to the air
conditioning system and will require
the replacement of all air conditioner
system components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does
not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain
government regulations require the recov-
ery and recycling of any refrigerant during
automotive air conditioner system service.
A NISSAN dealer has the trained techni-
cians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system re-
frigerant.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer when servicing your air conditioner
system.
10-8 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE
Model MRA8DE MR16DDT
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline 4-cylinder, inline
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.138 x 3.547 (79.7 x 90.1) 3.138 x 3.193 (79.7 x 81.1)
Displacement cu in (cm
3
) 109.71 (1,798) 98.73 (1,618)
Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–3–4–2
Idle speed
No adjustment is necessary. No adjustment is necessary.
M/T
CVT (in “N” position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO%atidle
Spark plug
PLZKAR6A-11 (all except California models)
DILKAR6A-11 (California models)
DILKAR7D11H
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
SPECIFICATIONS
Technical and consumer information 10-9
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)
Aluminum 16 x 6.5J
17 x 6.5J
18 x 7J
1.77 (45)
1.77 (45)
1.77 (45)
Steel 16 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45)
Tire size P205/55R16
205/50R17
215/45ZR18
Spare tire T125/70D16
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Model Unit: in (mm)
Overall length NISMO 183.6 (4,664)
Except NISMO 182.5 (4,635)
Overall width 69.3 (1,761)
Overall height NISMO 58.9 (1,497)
S and SV 58.8 (1,495)
SR, SR Turbo and SL 59.0 (1,499)
Front Track 60.2 (1,530)
Rear Track 60.2 (1,530)
Wheelbase 106.3 (2,700)
Gross vehicle weight
rating
lbs. (kg)
Refer to “F.M.V.S.S./C.
M.V.S.S. certification
label” on the center
pillar between the
driver’s side front
and rear doors.
Gross axle weight rating
Front lbs. (kg)
Rear lbs. (kg)
10-10 Technical and consumer information
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gaso-
line vehicles must be operated with un-
leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards
vary according to the country, state, prov-
ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-
tions may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, trans-
portation and registration are the re-
sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-
sponsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate is attached as shown. This number is
the identification for your vehicle and is
used in the vehicle registration.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is lo-
cated as shown.
TI1050M STI0465
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Technical and consumer information 10-11
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-
cation label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.
LDI2189 STI0349 WTI0189
10-12 Technical and consumer information
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL (if so equipped)
The air conditioner specification label is af-
fixed to the underside of the hood as
shown.
Use the following steps to mount the front
license plate:
1. Hold the front license plate bracket
against the front bumper fascia and
mark two locations
䊊
A
.
2. Drill two shallow 0.39 in (10 mm) holes in
the front bumper fascia at the two lo-
cations marked in the previous step.
LTI0197 LTI2048 LTI2231
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
Technical and consumer information 10-13
3. Insert two grommets
䊊
B
into the holes
in the front bumper fascia.
4. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver
into the grommet holes to turn the
threaded part of the grommet 90°.
5. Mount the front license plate bracket
using two screws
䊊
C
.
WARNING
∙ It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside a ve-
hicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-
cluding: standard parts, fluids,
emergency tools and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not
include passengers and cargo.
∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight
of passengers and cargo.
∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other op-
tional equipment. This informa-
tion is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle, pas-
sengers, cargo, and trailer.
LTI2232
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
10-14 Technical and consumer information
∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
limit, Total load capacity - maxi-
mum total weight limit specified
of the load (passengers and
cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-
hicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load.
This information is located on the
Tire and Loading Information la-
bel.
∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the
load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Ca-
pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label.
To get “the combined weight of oc-
cupants and cargo”, add the weight
of all occupants, then add the total
luggage weight. Examples are
shown in the following illustration.
Technical and consumer information 10-15
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information la-
bel.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your ve-
hicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =
650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
Example
WTI0169
10-16 Technical and consumer information
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in
step 4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-
firm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Measure-
ment of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label” in this section.
LOADING TIPS
∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
∙ Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.
∙ Overloading not only can
shorten the life of your vehicle
and the tire, but can also cause
unsafe vehicle handling and
longer braking distances. This
may cause a premature tire fail-
ure which could result in a seri-
ous accident and personal in-
jury. Failures caused by
overloading are not covered by
the vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle.When the ve-
hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh the front and the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the gross axle weight
ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
loads should not exceed the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These
ratings are given on the vehicle cer-
tification label. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.
Technical and consumer information 10-17
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-
hicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward.
∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve-
hicle with the front tires on the
ground. Doing so may cause serious
and expensive damage to the
powertrain.
∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing).
Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal trans-
mission parts due to lack of transmis-
sion lubrication.
∙ For emergency towing procedures re-
fer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
Manual Transmission (if so
equipped)
∙ Always tow with the manual transmis-
sion in N (Neutral).
∙ After towing 500 miles (805 km), start
and idle the engine with the transmis-
sion in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Fail-
ure to idle the engine after every
500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause
damage to internal transmission parts.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (if so equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu-
ously variable transmission, an appropriate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the
towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow
the dolly manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions when using their product.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-
ity Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
10-18 Technical and consumer information
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include ac-
celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat, and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the mini-
mum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly in-
flated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-
lowing emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
formation Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-
ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
formation Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-
ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
Technical and consumer information 10-19
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a re-
call and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other in-
formation about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contact-
ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-
ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Trans-
port Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
request that NISSAN conduct a recall
campaign. However, Transport
Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada’s
Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-
sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
may also report safety defects online
at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-
Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-
cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)
or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-
Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-
cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be obtained
from Transport Canada’s Road Safety
Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371
or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English speakers) or
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety con-
cerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at 1-800-
387-0122.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
10-20 Technical and consumer information
Due to legal requirements in some states
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
“ready condition” for an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-
hicle.
If a powertrain system component is re-
paired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-
tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the
vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-
tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-
dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a ve-
hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-
signed to record data related to vehicle dy-
namics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
cord such data as:
∙ How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
∙ Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better un-
derstanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g.
name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash in-
vestigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be
accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
Technical and consumer information 10-21
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-
chased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genu-
ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genu-
ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please visit the near-
est NISSAN dealer. For the phone number
and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-
resentative will assist you.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
10-22 Technical and consumer information
11 Index
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) .....................1-44
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bagsystem)................1-51
Side and curtain (See supplemental side
air bag and curtain side-impact
airbagsystem)..............1-59
Air bag warning labels ............1-62
Airbagwarninglight..........1-63, 2-19
Air bag warning light,
supplemental ..............1-63, 2-19
Air cleaner ...................8-18
Air cleaner housing filter ..........8-18
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation ....4-26,4-32
Air conditioner service..........4-34
Air conditioner specification label . .10-13
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations ............10-8
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations ............10-8
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) ..............4-31
Heater and air conditioner
controls...............4-24,4-32
Heater and air conditioner
(manual) ..................4-23
Servicing air conditioner ........4-34
Air flow charts .............4-20,4-27
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) .......2-36
Anchor point locations ...........1-28
Antenna ....................4-73
Antifreeze ...................5-77
Anti-lock brake warning light........2-14
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-73
Apps.......................4-74
APPS button...................4-7
Armrests.....................1-7
Audible reminders ..............2-22
Audiosystem.................4-34
AMradioreception............4-35
Bluetooth® audio .........4-69,4-70
Bluetooth® streaming audio ......4-70
Compact disc (CD)
player.............4-46,4-51,4-58
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player....................4-43
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player................4-48,4-53
FMradioreception............4-35
iPod®Player.............4-63,4-66
iPod® player operation ......4-63,4-66
Radio ....................4-34
Steering wheel audio control
switch....................4-72
USBinterface............4-59,4-61
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port..................4-59,4-61
Autolightswitch...............2-42
Automatic
Automatic power window switch. . .2-58
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ....3-32
Automatic door locks .............3-7
Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) ...................2-14,5-62
AUXjack....................4-59
B
Back button ...................4-7
Battery..................5-77,8-14
Charge warning light...........2-15
Battery replacement ............8-25
Keyfob................8-25,8-26
NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........8-27
Before starting the engine .........5-14
Belt(Seedrivebelt)..............8-16
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ..........5-27
Bluetooth® audio ...........4-69,4-70
Bluetooth® hands-free phone
system .....................4-79
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
N
avigationSystem..............4-91
Bluetooth® streaming audio with
NavigationSystem..............4-70
Bluetooth® streaming audio without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . .4-69
Booster seats .................1-41
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....5-73
Brakefluid.................8-12
Brakelight(Seestoplight).......8-33
Brakesystem...............5-72
Brakewarninglight............2-14
Brakewearindicators.......2-22,8-21
Self-adjustingbrakes...........8-21
Brakeandclutchfluid.............8-12
Brake assist ...................5-74
Brakefluid....................8-12
Brakes......................8-21
Brake system..................5-72
Break-in schedule ...............5-68
Brightness/contrast button .........4-9
Brightness control
Instrument panel .............2-45
Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-14
Bulb replacement ...............8-33
C
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants....................10-2
Cargo
(See vehicle loading information) .....10-14
Car phone or CB radio ............4-79
CDcareandcleaning.............4-71
CD player
(See audio system)........4-46,4-51,4-58
Check tire press .................2-6
Check tire pressure ..............2-34
Childrestraints........1-21, 1-22, 1-23, 1-26
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren)System..............1-26
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-23, 1-30, 1-36, 1-41
Top tether strap anchor point
locations...................1-28
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7
Chimes, audible reminders .........2-22
Cleaningexteriorandinterior......7-2,7-4
Clock
(models without navigation system)
. .4-50
Clockset....................4-50
Clock set/adjustment .............4-7
Clock setting (models with Navigation
System)......................4-7
Clock setting (models without Navigation
System)...........4-44,4-45,4-49,4-50
Clutch
Clutchfluid.................8-12
C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-12
Cold weather driving .............5-77
Compact disc (CD) player . . .4-46, 4-51, 4-58
Connect phone ................4-74
Console box ..................2-53
Console light ..................2-61
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .....................5-9,5-17
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ..................8-11
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ..........5-9,5-17
Control panel buttons .............4-4
Back button .................4-7
Brightness/contrast button .......4-9
Enterbutton.................4-4
Settingbutton................4-7
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel).....4-72
Heater and air conditioner
controls................4-24,4-32
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Changing engine coolant .........8-6
Checking engine coolant level ......8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-7
Corrosionprotection..............7-8
Cruisecontrol.................5-45
Cupholders...................2-55
Curtain side-impact air bag system
(See supplemental side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag system) ........1-59
D
Daytime Running Light System ......2-44
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror
defrosterswitch..............2-40
Dimensions and weights ..........10-10
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-45
Display controls
(see control panel buttons) ..........4-4
Door locks ....................3-5
Door open warning light ...........2-15
Drivebelt ....................8-16
Driving
Coldweatherdriving...........5-77
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ..........5-9,5-17
Driving with manual
transmission .............5-10,5-23
Precautions when starting and
driving .....................5-2
Driving the vehicle ...............5-17
11-2
E
E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH .............2-49
ECO mode switch ...............5-26
Economy - fuel .................5-70
Emergency engine shutoff..........5-13
Emission control information label . . . .10-12
Emission control system warranty . . . .10-19
Engine
Before starting the engine ........5-14
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Changing engine coolant .........8-6
Changing engine oil ............8-8
Changing engine oil filter.........8-10
Checking engine coolant level ......8-6
Checking engine oil level .........8-7
Engine compartment check
locations...................8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-7
Engine cooling system ..........8-5
Engine oil ...................8-7
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation .............10-7
Engine oil pressure warning light ....2-15
Engine oil viscosity.............10-7
Engine serial number ..........10-12
Engine specifications ...........10-9
Starting the engine ............5-15
Engine Block Heater .............5-78
Engine coolant temperature gauge.....2-7
Enterbutton...................4-4
EventDatarecorders ............10-21
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......5-2
Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items.......................9-5
Extended storage switch ..........8-25
Eyeglasscase.................2-54
F
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) ....6-2
Flattire....................6-3,6-3
Floormatpositioningaid...........7-7
Fluid
Brakefluid..................8-12
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Clutchfluid.................8-12
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid......................8-11
Engine coolant ...............8-5
Engine oil ...................8-7
F.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-12
Foglightswitch................2-46
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-51
Front-door pocket ..............2-50
Front power seat adjustment ........1-5
Frontseats....................1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Fuel economy ...............5-70
Fuel-filler cap ................3-28
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-27
Fuel-filler lid .................3-28
Fuel gauge ..................2-8
Fueloctanerating.............10-6
Fuel recommendation ..........10-4
Loose fuel cap warning .......2-6, 2-33
Fuelefficientdrivingtips...........5-68
Fuel-filler door .................3-27
Fuel gauge ....................2-8
Fuses.......................8-22
Fusiblelinks...................8-23
G
Gar
age door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . .2-63, 2-64, 2-65, 2-66, 2-66, 2-67
Gascap.....................3-28
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-7
Fuel gauge ..................2-8
Odometer ..................2-5
Speedometer..............2-4,2-5
Tachometer .................2-7
Trip computer ................2-9
Trip odometer .............2-4, 2-5
General maintenance .............9-2
Glovebox....................2-53
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-79
Hazardwarningflasherswitch........6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-41
Headlightcontrolswitch...........2-41
Headlights...................8-29
Headrestraints..................1-7
Heatedseats..................2-47
11-3
Heated seat switches.............2-47
Heater
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) ...............4-31
Heater and air conditioner
controls................4-24,4-32
Heater and air conditioner
(manual)...................4-23
Heater operation ....4-17,4-19,4-25,4-33
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . .4-31
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver . .2-63, 2-64, 2-65, 2-66, 2-66, 2-67
Hood .......................3-25
Horn.......................2-47
I
Ignition switch ..................5-9
Push-button ignition switch .......5-11
Immobilizer system........2-38,5-11, 5-14
Important vehicle information label . . .10-12
In-cabinmicrofilter..............8-19
Increasing fuel economy...........5-70
Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator...................5-13
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders).................2-19,3-21
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror.....3-32
Instrument brightness control .......2-45
Instrument panel .............0-6,2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-45
Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system
Brake assist .................5-47
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range............3-13
Key operation ................3-14
Mechanical key ...............3-4
Remote keyless entry operation. .3-9, 3-18
Troubleshooting guide.......3-23,3-24
Warning signals ...........3-23,3-24
Interiorlight...............2-60,2-62
Interiortrunklidrelease...........3-26
iPod®Player...............4-63,4-66
ISOFIX child restraints.............1-26
J
Jumpstarting...............6-9,8-15
K
Key.........................3-2
Key fob battery replacement.....8-25,8-26
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system).....3-9,3-18
Without Intelligent Key system
(See remote keyless entry system) . . .3-8
Keys
NISSAN Intelligent Key®........3-2,3-11
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys......................3-4
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13
C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-12
Emission control information label . .10-12
Engine serial number ..........10-12
F.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-12
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate.....................10-11
Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-62
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren)System................1-26
License plate
Installing the license plate .......10-13
Light
Airbagwarninglight........1-63, 2-19
Brakelight(Seestoplight)........8-33
Bulb check/instrument panel ......2-14
Bulb replacement .............8-33
Charge warning light ...........2-15
Console light ................2-61
ExteriorandInteriorlights........8-33
Foglights..................8-31
Foglightswitch..............2-46
Headlight and turn signal switch ....2-41
Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-41
Headlights.................8-29
Interiorlight.............2-60,2-62
Lightbulbs.................8-29
Low tire pressure warning light .....2-16
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light..................2-18,2-34
11-4
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-54
Security indicator light ..........2-21
Spotlights(Seemaplight)........2-61
Trunklight..................2-63
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders ...............2-19,3-21
Lights......................8-29
Maplights..................2-61
Lock
Child safety rear door lock ........3-7
Door locks ..................3-5
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-27
Power door locks ..............3-6
Trunk lid lock opener lever........3-26
Loose fuel cap warning .........2-6,2-33
Lowfuelwarninglight......2-16,2-18,2-33
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-16
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light....................2-18,2-34
Luggage
(See vehicle loading information) .....10-14
M
Maintenance
General maintenance ...........9-2
Insidethevehicle..............9-3
Maintenance precautions.........8-2
Outsidethevehicle.............9-2
Seat belt maintenance ..........1-20
Under the hood and vehicle .......9-4
Maintenance log ................9-14
Maintenance requirements..........9-2
Maintenance schedules ............9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions....................9-13
Malfunctionindicatorlight..........2-20
Manual front seat adjustment ........1-3
Maplights....................2-61
Map pocket ...................2-51
Meters and gauges...............2-3
Instrument brightness control .....2-45
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . .3-32
Outsidemirrorcontrol..........3-33
Outsidemirrors..............3-33
Rearview...................3-32
Vanitymirror................3-31
Mirrors......................3-32
Mobile apps...................4-74
Moonroof .................2-59,2-59
N
NissanConnect® ................4-74
NissanConnect® Services ..........4-75
NISSAN Intelligent Key®..........3-2,3-11
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator.....................5-13
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System...............2-38,5-11, 5-14
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6
Odometer ....................2-5
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Changing engine oil ............8-8
Changing engine oil filter.........8-10
Checking engine oil level .........8-7
Engine oil ...................8-7
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation .............10-7
Engine oil viscosity.............10-7
One shot call ..............4-83,4-94
Outsidemirrorcontrol............3-33
Outsidemirrors................3-33
Overhead sunglasses holder ........2-54
Overheat
Ifyourvehicleoverheats.........6-11
Owner's manual order form ........10-22
Owner's manual/service manual order
information..................10-22
P
Parking
Parking/parkingonhills.........5-70
Parkingbrake .................5-25
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-79
Power
Power door locks ..............3-6
P
oweroutlet................2-49
Powerrearwindows...........2-57
Power steering system ..........5-71
Powerwindows..............2-56
Rearpowerwindows...........2-57
Poweroutlet..................2-49
Powersteering.................5-71
11-5
Precautions
Maintenance precautions.........8-2
Precautions on booster
seats............1-23, 1-30, 1-36, 1-41
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-23, 1-30, 1-36, 1-41
Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-12
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-44
Precautions when starting and
driving .....................5-2
Programmable features ............4-7
Push starting ..................6-11
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio ..........4-79
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player....................4-43
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player.................4-48,4-53
Steering wheel audio control
switch....................4-72
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M)test....................10-21
RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA)........5-37
Rearpowerwindows.............2-57
Rearseat.....................1-6
Rearviewmirror................3-32
RearViewMonitor...............4-10
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch......................2-40
Recommended Fluids ............10-2
Recorders
EventData.................10-21
Refrigerant recommendation ........10-8
Registering a vehicle in another
country .....................10-11
Remote keyless entry system ........3-8
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-20
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock ........3-7
Childseatbelts......1-23, 1-30, 1-36, 1-41
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-20
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment ......1-3
Front power seat adjustment ......1-5
Rear seat adjustment ...........1-6
Seatback pockets ...............2-51
Seat belt
Childsafety.................1-21
Infants and small children ........1-22
InjuredPerson................1-15
Largerchildren...............1-22
Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-12
Pregnant women..............1-15
Seat belt extenders ............1-20
Seat belt maintenance ..........1-20
Seatbelts................1-12, 7-7
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-19
Three-pointtypewithretractor.....1-15
Seat belt extenders ..............1-20
Seatbeltwarninglight.........1-15, 2-18
Seats
Adjustment ..................1-2
Armrests ...................1-7
Frontseats..................1-2
Heatedseats................2-47
Manual front seat adjustment ......1-3
Rearseat...................1-6
Security
indicator light ............2-21
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start .......2-38,5-11, 5-14
Security systems
Vehicle security system ......2-36,2-36
Self-adjusting brakes .............8-21
Service manual order form.........10-22
Servicing air conditioner ...........4-34
Settingbutton..................4-7
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .....................5-19
Manual transmission ...........5-23
Shiftlockrelease................5-21
Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-19
Side air bag system (See supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag
system).....................1-59
Siri® Eyes-Free .................4-75
Smartphone connectivity ..........4-74
Spark plug replacement ...........8-17
Spark plugs ...................8-17
Specifications..................10-9
Speedometer................2-4,2-5
SPORT mode switch .............5-26
Spotlights(Seemaplight)..........2-61
SRS warning label ...............1-62
Stability control.................5-74
Standard maintenance ............9-8
11-6
Starting
Before starting the engine ........5-14
Jumpstarting.............6-9,8-15
Precautions when starting and
driving.....................5-2
Push starting ................6-11
Starting the engine ............5-15
Starting the engine ..............5-15
Starting the engine (models with NISSAN
Intelligent Key® system) ...........5-16
Steering
Power steering system ..........5-71
Steering wheel .................3-30
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-72
Stoplight....................8-33
Storage.....................2-50
Storagetray..................2-52
Sunglasses case................2-54
Sunglasses holder ..............2-54
Sunroof .....................2-59
Sunroof (see Moonroof) ...........2-59
Sunvisors....................3-30
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-62
Supplemental air bag warning
light.....................1-63, 2-19
Supplemental front impact air bag
system ......................1-51
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . .1-62
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-44
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) .......1-44
Supplemental side and curtain side-impact
airbagsystem.................1-59
Switch
Autolightswitch..............2-42
Automatic power window switch . . .2-58
Foglightswitch..............2-46
Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch ....2-41
Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-41
Ignition switch ................5-9
Instrument brightness control .....2-45
Power door lock switch ..........3-6
Rear window and outside mirror
defrosterswitch..............2-40
Turn signal switch .............2-45
T
Tachometer ...................2-7
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-7
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start ............2-38,5-11, 5-14
Three-waycatalyst...............5-2
Tilt
Telescopicsteering............3-30
Tire
Flattire..................6-3,6-3
Spare tire ...............6-4,8-46
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13
Tire chains .................8-42
Tire pressure ................8-35
Tirerotation ................8-43
Types of tires ................8-41
Uniform tire quality grading ......10-18
Wheels and tires ..............8-35
Wheel/tire size...............10-10
Tire pressure
Lowtirepressurewarninglight.....2-16
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)....................2-6,5-3
Towing
2-wheel drive models ...........6-14
4-wheel drive models ...........6-13
Flattowing.................10-18
Trailertowing...............10-18
Towingatrailer................10-18
Towingyourvehicle..............6-12
Transceiver
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . .2-63,
2-64, 2-65, 2-66, 2-66, 2-67
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid......................8-11
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ..........5-9,5-17
Driving with manual
transmission.............5-10, 5-23
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country) .....................10-11
Trip computer ..................2-9
Trip odometer ...............2-4,2-5
T
roubleshooting guide
(NISSAN voice recognition system) ....4-106
Trunk access through the rear seat ....3-27
Trunklid.....................3-26
Trunk lid lock opener lever..........3-26
Trunklight....................2-63
Turn signal switch ...............2-45
11-7
U
Uniform tire quality grading ........10-18
USBinterface ..............4-59,4-61
Audio file operation ........4-60,4-62
V
Vanitymirror..................3-31
Variable voltage control system ......8-16
Vehicle dimensions and weights .....10-10
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
OFFswitch...................2-48
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-74
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-74
Vehicle identification .............10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) ...............10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate.......................10-11
Vehicle immobilizer system . . .2-38, 5-11, 5-14
Vehicleinformationdisplay.........2-23
Vehicle loading information ........10-14
Vehiclerecovery................6-14
Vehicle security system ........2-36,2-36
Vehicle security system (NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start ............2-38,5-11, 5-14
Vents.......................4-17
Visors......................3-30
Voice Prompt Interrupt ........4-83,4-94
Voice Recognition System .........4-101
W
Warning
Airbagwarninglight........1-63, 2-19
Anti-lock brake warning light ......2-14
Battery charge warning light ......2-15
Brakewarninglight............2-14
Door open warning light .........2-15
Engine oil pressure warning light ....2-15
Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2
Loose fuel cap warning .......2-6,2-33
Lowfuelwarninglight....2-16,2-18,2-33
Low tire pressure warning light .....2-16
Low windshield-washer fluid
warninglight.............2-18,2-34
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-54
Seatbeltwarninglight.......1-15, 2-18
Supplemental air bag
warninglight.............1-63, 2-19
Vehicle security system ......2-36,2-36
Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders ..........2-19,3-21
Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-62
Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders ............2-19,3-21
Audible reminders ..........2-19,3-21
Indicatorlights............2-19,3-21
Warninglights............2-19,3-21
Warninglights..............2-19,3-21
Warning lights, indicator lights
and audible reminders ............2-13
Weights (See dimensions
andweights)..................10-10
Wheels and tires ................8-35
Wheel/tire size.................10-10
When traveling or registering
in another country ..............10-11
Windows ....................2-56
Locking passengers' windows .....2-57
Powerrearwindows...........2-57
Powerwindows..............2-56
Rearpowerwindows...........2-57
Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-13
Windshield wiper blades ...........8-19
Wiper
Wiper blades ................8-19
Wiper and washer switch ..........2-39
11-8
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
MRA8DE
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
MR16DDT
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded
premium gasoline with an octane rating of
at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number
(Research octane number 96). If unleaded
premium gasoline is not available, you may
use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research oc-
tane rating number 91), but you may notice
a decrease in performance.
CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85.Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and sys-
tems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-
tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and ve-
hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-
ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-
tent, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-
lated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”
For additional information, refer to “Engine
oil and oil filter recommendations” in the
“Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, refer to “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.
The label is typically located on the driver
side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Break-in
schedule” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in vehicle
damage or shortened engine life.
B17-D
Printing : September 2017
Publication No.:
Printed in U.S.A.
OM18EM 0B17U0
‘18
